[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2015118634A1 - Lighting device, observation device, and observation method - Google Patents

Lighting device, observation device, and observation method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015118634A1
WO2015118634A1 PCT/JP2014/052690 JP2014052690W WO2015118634A1 WO 2015118634 A1 WO2015118634 A1 WO 2015118634A1 JP 2014052690 W JP2014052690 W JP 2014052690W WO 2015118634 A1 WO2015118634 A1 WO 2015118634A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
diffracted light
phase
unit
drive control
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2014/052690
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
畑田 仁志
大内 由美子
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Nikon Corp
Original Assignee
Nikon Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nikon Corp filed Critical Nikon Corp
Priority to PCT/JP2014/052690 priority Critical patent/WO2015118634A1/en
Publication of WO2015118634A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015118634A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/58Optics for apodization or superresolution; Optical synthetic aperture systems
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B21/00Microscopes
    • G02B21/0004Microscopes specially adapted for specific applications
    • G02B21/002Scanning microscopes
    • G02B21/0024Confocal scanning microscopes (CSOMs) or confocal "macroscopes"; Accessories which are not restricted to use with CSOMs, e.g. sample holders
    • G02B21/0032Optical details of illumination, e.g. light-sources, pinholes, beam splitters, slits, fibers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B21/00Microscopes
    • G02B21/06Means for illuminating specimens
    • G02B21/08Condensers
    • G02B21/12Condensers affording bright-field illumination
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B21/00Microscopes
    • G02B21/36Microscopes arranged for photographic purposes or projection purposes or digital imaging or video purposes including associated control and data processing arrangements
    • G02B21/365Control or image processing arrangements for digital or video microscopes
    • G02B21/367Control or image processing arrangements for digital or video microscopes providing an output produced by processing a plurality of individual source images, e.g. image tiling, montage, composite images, depth sectioning, image comparison

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an illumination device, an observation device, and an observation method.
  • a super-resolution microscope that enables observation beyond the resolution of the optical system in a microscope apparatus.
  • the specimen is illuminated with spatially modulated illumination light to obtain a modulated image, and the modulation component contained in the modulated image is removed (demodulated), thereby super-resolution of the specimen.
  • a structured illumination microscope (SIM) that generates an image is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
  • SIM structured illumination microscope
  • a super-resolution image is generated based on a plurality of images picked up by applying phase modulation to the illumination light beam, thereby enabling observation beyond the resolution of the optical system.
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an illumination device, an observation device, and an observation method that can shorten the time for generating a super-resolution image.
  • One embodiment of the present invention is an illumination device that illuminates a specimen with interference fringes, a light beam generation unit that generates a first light beam and a second light beam from light emitted from a light source; A phase applying unit that provides a phase difference between the first light bundle and the second light bundle; an interference optical system that generates interference fringes by causing the first light bundle and the second light bundle to interfere; and An illumination device comprising: a drive control unit that drives each of the bundle generation unit and the phase applying unit to change at least one of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference.
  • an image is formed by the above-described illumination device, an imaging optical system that forms an image of a sample illuminated by the interference fringe by the illumination device, and the imaging optical system.
  • An observation apparatus comprising: an imaging unit that captures an image of the specimen; and a calculation unit that generates an image of the specimen based on the image captured by the imaging unit.
  • the above-described illumination device illuminates the specimen with interference fringes and is imaged by an imaging optical system that forms an image of the specimen illuminated by the illumination.
  • An observation method comprising: capturing an image of the sample; and a calculation procedure for generating an image of the sample based on the image of the sample captured by the imaging.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an observation apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is the top view of the diffraction grating seen from the direction of the optical axis of an illumination optical system. It is a top view of the shutter member seen from the direction of the optical axis of an illumination optical system. It is a figure which shows the position on the conjugate surface of the spot light formed by converging each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating on the conjugate surface. It is a figure which shows a transmissive member. It is a figure which shows the light beam from a shutter member to an illumination area
  • FIG. 1 shows the observation apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is the top view which looked at the shutter member and the transmissive member from the direction of the optical axis. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st example of the positional relationship of a light beam production
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an observation apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the observation apparatus 1 of this embodiment is a microscope apparatus that observes a specimen SP such as a living body cell, for example.
  • the observation apparatus 1 includes an illumination device 10, an imaging optical system 200, an imaging unit 210, and a calculation unit 220.
  • the illumination device 10 illuminates the specimen SP with interference fringes.
  • the imaging optical system 200 forms an image of the specimen SP (interference fringe image) illuminated by the illumination device 10 with the interference fringes.
  • the imaging unit 210 captures an image of the specimen SP imaged by the imaging optical system 200.
  • the computing unit 220 generates an image of the specimen SP based on the image captured by the imaging unit 210.
  • the illumination device 10 forms interference fringes on the predetermined illumination area LA with the illumination light IL.
  • the specimen SP is arranged on or near the illumination area LA. That is, the illuminating device 10 illuminates the specimen SP with the illumination light IL and forms interference fringes on the specimen SP.
  • the illumination device 10 includes a light source device 100, a light beam generation unit 110, a phase adding unit 120, an illumination optical system 150, and a drive control unit 160.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 generates a first light beam and a second light beam from the light emitted from the light source device 100.
  • the diffracted light LM1 shown in FIG. 1 is an example of a first light beam.
  • the diffracted light LM2 shown in FIG. 1 is an example of a second light beam.
  • the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux.
  • the illumination optical system 150 generates interference fringes by causing the first light flux and the second light flux to interfere in the illumination area LA (so-called two-beam interference).
  • the drive control unit 160 drives each of the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase imparting unit 120, and the interference fringe direction and the interference fringe phase (that is, the phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux) and To control.
  • the illumination optical system 150 is an example of an interference optical system.
  • the direction of the interference fringes indicates a direction in which the light intensity periodically changes in the light intensity distribution of the interference fringes formed in the illumination area LA.
  • the light source device 100 includes a light source 101, a light guide member 102, and a collimator 103.
  • the light source 101 includes a light emitting element such as a laser diode.
  • the light guide member 102 includes, for example, an optical fiber, and guides light from the light source 101 to the collimator 103.
  • the collimator 103 that uses an emission end face from which light is emitted from the light guide member 102 as a secondary light source makes the light emitted from the secondary light source parallel light.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 includes a diffraction grating 111 and a shutter member 131.
  • the diffraction grating 111 is disposed in the optical path between the light source device 100 and the illumination optical system 150.
  • the light emitted from the light source 101 and diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is appropriately referred to as illumination light IL.
  • the shutter member 131 is disposed on the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA.
  • the phase applying unit 120 includes a transmission member 141 that transmits at least part of the light from the light source 101.
  • the transmission member 141 is disposed on the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA.
  • the transmitting member 141 is an example of the phase applying unit 120. Details of the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase applying unit 120 will be described later.
  • the illumination optical system 150 is a refractive optical system including a plurality of lens members.
  • the illumination optical system 150 includes a projection lens 151, a relay lens 152, a diaphragm member 155, a field lens 153, a dichroic mirror 156, an excitation filter 156a, a barrier filter 156b, and an objective lens 154.
  • At least one of the projection lens 151, the relay lens 152, the field lens 153, and the objective lens 154 includes a lens member having a rotationally symmetric shape around a predetermined symmetry axis.
  • a lens member include a spherical lens and an aspheric lens.
  • the symmetry axis of the rotationally symmetric lens member included in the illumination optical system 150 is appropriately referred to as an optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the projection lens 151 forms an image of the light exit end face of the light guide member 102 on the conjugate plane OS1.
  • a plane conjugate with the diffraction grating 111 is defined as a conjugate plane OS2.
  • An intermediate image of the diffraction grating 111 is formed on the conjugate plane OS2.
  • a plane optically conjugate with the conjugate plane OS2 is defined as a conjugate plane OS3. Since the conjugate plane OS2 is optically conjugate with the diffraction grating 111, the conjugate plane OS3 is optically conjugate with the diffraction grating 111.
  • the illumination area LA of the illumination device 10 is set in the vicinity of the conjugate plane OS3 so that the focusing accuracy of the interference fringes formed on the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP is within an allowable range.
  • the diaphragm member 155 is a so-called field diaphragm, and is disposed on or near the conjugate plane OS2. Since the diaphragm member 155 is disposed on the conjugate surface OS2 optically conjugate with the illumination area LA, the outer shape of the illumination area LA is similar to the outer shape of the passage area through which the illumination light IL passes in the diaphragm member 155. Thus, the diaphragm member 155 defines the shape of the illumination area LA.
  • the illumination optical system 150 is an epi-illumination system.
  • the objective lens 154 serves as both a part of the illumination optical system 150 and a part of the imaging optical system 200.
  • the optical path from the field lens 153 to the illumination area LA is bent by a dichroic mirror 156.
  • the dichroic mirror 156 is disposed in the optical path between the field lens 153 and the objective lens 154.
  • the surface on which the light from the field lens 153 is incident is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the surface on which light from the field lens 153 is incident on the dichroic mirror 156 has a characteristic that at least a part of the illumination light IL from the field lens 153 is reflected. At least a part of the light that has entered the dichroic mirror 156 from the field lens 153 is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, the traveling direction is bent, and enters the illumination area LA through the objective lens 154.
  • the imaging optical system 200 includes an objective lens 154 and an imaging lens 157.
  • the objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157 form an image of the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP on the conjugate plane OS4.
  • the conjugate plane OS4 corresponds to an image plane when the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP is the object plane.
  • An image of the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL is formed on the conjugate plane OS4.
  • one or both of the objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157 includes a lens member having a rotationally symmetric shape around a predetermined symmetry axis, and this symmetry axis is called the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200. .
  • the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200 is coaxial with the optical axis of the objective lens 154.
  • the optical axis AX2 is set almost perpendicular to the optical axis of the illumination optical system 150 from the projection lens 151 to the field lens 153. Is done.
  • the dichroic mirror 156 is disposed in the optical path between the objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157, and has a characteristic that at least part of the light from the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL passes.
  • the surface of the dichroic mirror 156 on which the light from the specimen SP is incident is inclined at an angle of, for example, about 45 ° with respect to each of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200. Yes.
  • the light from the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL enters the conjugate plane OS4 via the objective lens 154, the dichroic mirror 156, and the imaging lens 157.
  • the dichroic mirror 156 has spectral characteristics, such that the wavelength band including the wavelength of the illumination light IL is reflected, and the wavelength band including the wavelength of the fluorescence emitted by the fluorescent material included in the specimen SP is transmitted.
  • the excitation filter 156a is a spectral characteristic filter for preventing unnecessary autofluorescence generated in the light source device 100 and the illumination optical system 150 from being guided to the specimen SP and the imaging optical system 200, and transmits the wavelength of the illumination light IL.
  • the barrier filter 156b is for preventing the illumination light IL from being reflected by the dichroic mirror 156 and partially irradiating the specimen SP so that it does not travel through the imaging optical system along with the fluorescence.
  • the device has an optical capacity of 5 or more for the wavelength band of the light IL, and the wavelength band including the fluorescence wavelength of the specimen SP has a high transmittance.
  • the above is equivalent to the functions of an excitation filter, a dichroic mirror, and a barrier filter in a general fluorescence microscope.
  • the imaging unit 210 includes an imaging element 211 and an imaging control unit 212.
  • the image sensor 211 includes an image sensor such as a CCD sensor or a CMOS sensor.
  • the image sensor 211 includes a light receiving surface on which a plurality of photodiodes are arranged, and a readout circuit that reads signals from the plurality of photodiodes.
  • the light receiving surface of the image sensor 211 is disposed on a conjugate surface OS4 that is optically conjugate with the illumination area LA in which the specimen SP is disposed.
  • the light receiving surface of the image sensor 211 may be displaced from the conjugate surface OS4 within the range of the focal depth in the direction of the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200.
  • the imaging control unit 212 controls the readout circuit of the imaging element 211 to control imaging timing and the like, and A / D converts the signal from the readout circuit and transfers the signal to the arithmetic unit 220.
  • the calculation unit 220 performs a calculation for generating an image of the specimen SP based on the signal transferred from the image sensor 211. Specifically, interference fringes of a plurality of phases (that is, a plurality of phase differences between the first and second light beams) controlled by the drive control unit 160 in each direction are sampled.
  • the calculation unit 220 is formed on the top, and sequentially generates an image of the sample on which each interference fringe is formed.
  • the interference fringes have three directions, and three kinds of phase differences (that is, three kinds of phase differences of the second light flux with respect to the first light flux) are formed on the sample.
  • the calculation unit 220 generates nine images. Note that the direction of the interference fringes and the type of the phase difference need not be three, and each may be three or more.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 includes a diffraction grating 111 and a shutter member 131.
  • the diffraction grating 111 in the present embodiment is a phase type diffraction grating in which concave and convex grooves are formed on a quartz substrate, and diffracts light incident from the light source device 100.
  • the diffraction grating 111 according to the present embodiment has a plate shape and is disposed substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the diffraction grating 111 has a fixed relative position to the illumination optical system 150 and is provided so as not to rotate.
  • the diffraction grating 111 has a periodic structure in which irregularities are periodically arranged in a direction parallel to a plane intersecting the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the diffraction grating 111 may be a phase-type diffraction grating in which a recess having a periodic structure is embedded with a material having a refractive index different from that of the protrusion.
  • An amplitude type diffraction grating having a light shielding film may be used.
  • a diffraction grating such as CGH may be used, and various diffraction gratings can be applied.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view of the diffraction grating 111 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the diffraction grating 111 according to the present embodiment is a so-called multidirectional diffraction grating, and a period in which unevenness is periodically arranged in each of the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3. It has a structure.
  • the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3 are different directions on a plane orthogonal to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3 are approximately in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. It is distributed at intervals of 120 °.
  • the light incident on the diffraction grating 111 is diffracted by the respective periodic structures in the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 has a periodic structure in three or more directions different from each other, and divides an incident light beam into a plurality of light beams distributed in three or more directions (multidirectional diffraction). Grid).
  • diffracted light including + (plus) 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light, and ⁇ (minus) 1st order diffracted light is refracted by the projection lens 151 and enters the shutter member 131.
  • the direction in which the light incident on each point of the diffraction grating 111 is diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is appropriately referred to as a diffraction direction.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 in the diffraction grating 111 are appropriately referred to as the + 1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1 and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1. .
  • the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 are appropriately referred to as the + 1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2 and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2.
  • + 1st order diffracted light and ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are appropriately referred to as + 1st order diffracted light in the third direction D3 and ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the third direction D3.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light LM1 emitted from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151, and is a point A1 on the conjugate plane OS1 determined by the diffraction angle from the diffraction grating 111 and the focal length of the projection lens 151. And is incident on the shutter member 131.
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light LM2 emitted from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151, and is a point on the conjugate plane OS1 determined by the diffraction angle from the diffraction grating 111 and the focal length of the projection lens 151.
  • the light is focused on A2 and enters the shutter member 131.
  • the position of the point A2 is point-symmetric with the position of the point A1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light in each diffraction direction is point-symmetric with respect to the optical path of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the same diffraction direction with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the shutter member 131 in the present embodiment is disposed in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1.
  • the shutter member 131 is plate-shaped, and the surface on which the diffracted light from the projection lens 151 is incident is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the shutter member 131 can rotate around the rotation axis AX3.
  • the rotation axis AX3 of the shutter member 131 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the shutter member 131 is rotatable relative to the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111.
  • the shutter member 131 rotates around the rotation axis AX3 by torque supplied from a driving unit such as an electric motor.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 to rotate the shutter member 131.
  • the drive control unit 160 can control the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 by controlling the drive unit.
  • the rotation angle is an angle when the rotated body is rotated by a certain angle around a certain rotation axis.
  • the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 being 120 ° refers to a case where the shutter member 131 is rotated by 120 ° around the rotation axis AX3.
  • the drive control unit 160 can control the relative rotation angle between the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131 by controlling the rotation angle of the shutter member 131. .
  • FIG. 3 is a plan view of the shutter member 131 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT through which light can pass and a light shielding portion AS that blocks light.
  • the light shielding part AS blocks the light from the projection lens 151 by one or both of absorption and reflection.
  • the light shielding part AS is, for example, a light shielding film formed on a base material
  • the passage part AT is, for example, a region inside an opening formed in the base material constituting the light shielding part AS.
  • the passage portion AT may be a gap between the light shielding portions AS, or may include a member that is disposed between the light shielding portions AS and through which light passes.
  • the shutter member 131 has a disk shape. At least a part of the light shielding part AS is arranged at a position different from the passing part AT in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX3.
  • the passage portion AT is an opening and includes a first passage portion ATa and a second passage portion ATb. Each of the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb is an opening having a triangular shape when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX3. As the first passing portion ATa and the second passing portion ATb are separated from the rotation axis AX3 in the radial direction from the rotation axis AX3, the dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the radial direction increase. As an example, as shown in FIG.
  • the shutter member 131 includes a first passage portion ATa having a central angle ⁇ a centered on the rotation axis AX3 and a center angle ⁇ b of 20 °, and a second passage portion. ATb. Further, in the shutter member 131, the rotation axis AX3 and the periphery thereof (for example, the region AS0 shown in FIG. 3) are not opened but are light shielding portions AS.
  • the first passage portion ATa is disposed at a point symmetrical with the second passage portion ATb with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light in each diffraction direction is point-symmetric with respect to the optical path of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the same diffraction direction with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the second passage portion ATb is Arranged in the optical path of the first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the direction D1. That is, in the first state, the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 pass through the shutter member 131 via the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb, respectively. .
  • the light-shielding portion AS is disposed in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3. . That is, the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are shielded by the shutter member 131.
  • the first passage portion ATa can be arranged in the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 by the rotation of the shutter member 131.
  • the second passage portion ATb is It is arranged in the optical path of ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in two directions D2.
  • the light-shielding part AS is arranged in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3.
  • the first passage portion ATa can be arranged on the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 by the rotation of the shutter member 131.
  • this state is referred to as a third state for convenience
  • the second passage portion ATb It is arranged in the optical path of ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the three directions D3.
  • the light-shielding part AS is arranged in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and in the optical path of ⁇ first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2.
  • the diffracted light passing through the passing part AT and the diffracted light blocked by the light shielding part AS are selected according to the rotation angle of the shutter member 131.
  • the shutter member 131 converts ⁇ first-order diffracted light distributed along one diffraction direction out of the plurality of light bundles divided by the diffraction grating 111 into the first light flux and the second light flux directed toward the illumination area LA. Choose as.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 includes two light beams distributed along one direction among a plurality of light beams distributed along each of three or more directions divided by the diffraction grating 111 (multidirectional diffraction grating). Is included as a first light flux and a second light flux.
  • the shutter member 131 is an example of a light beam selection unit.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the position on the conjugate plane OS1 of the spot light formed by converging each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 on the conjugate plane OS1.
  • the region A1 where the spot of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. It is point-symmetric with the region A2 where the spot of the first-order diffracted light is arranged.
  • the spot of the first order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is arranged with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. And point symmetry with respect to the region A4.
  • the spot of the first order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 is arranged with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • point symmetry with respect to the region A6 In the region A5 where the spot of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 is arranged, the spot of the first order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 is arranged with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • point symmetry with respect to the region A6 is arranged in the region A6.
  • the region A1 to the region A6 surround the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and are arranged in a discrete manner.
  • the area A1 to the area A6 are arranged 60 degrees apart in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the angle in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 is also referred to as a rotation angle for convenience.
  • the region A2 is rotated at a rotation angle of 180 ° and the region A3 is rotated.
  • the region A4 is disposed at a rotation angle of 240 °
  • the region A5 is disposed at a rotation angle of 120 °
  • the region A6 is disposed at a rotation angle of 300 °.
  • the phase providing unit 120 includes a transmission member 141 that transmits at least part of the light from the light source 101.
  • the transmitting member 141 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1.
  • the transmission member 141 is a plate-like member, and the surface on which light from the light source 101 enters is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the transmission member 141 is rotatable around the rotation axis AX4. In the present embodiment, the rotation axis AX4 of the transmission member 141 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the transmissive member 141 can rotate relative to the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111.
  • the transmission member 141 is rotated by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 to rotate the transmission member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160 can control the rotation angle of the transmission member 141 by controlling the drive unit.
  • the drive control unit 160 can control the relative rotation angle between the optical path of each order of diffracted light from the diffraction grating 111 and the transmission member 141 by controlling the rotation angle of the transmission member 141. .
  • FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the transmissive member 141
  • FIG. 5B is a plan view of the transmissive member 141 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150
  • FIG. 5C is an end view of the transmissive member 141. It is the side view seen from the direction.
  • the transmissive member 141 has a disk shape.
  • the transmissive member 141 includes a first region 121 and a second region 122.
  • the transmission member 141 in the second region 122 and the transmission member 141 in the first region 121 are materials that can transmit the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111.
  • the transmitting member 141 transmits the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 with the phase of the diffracted light passing through the first region 121 and the phase of the diffracted light passing through the second region 122 being different from each other. .
  • a phase difference is set between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122.
  • the transmission member sets the first region 121 as a reference phase region by giving a phase difference to the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 with reference to the phase of the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121.
  • the second region 122 converts the phase of the transmitted diffracted light into a phase different from the reference phase and passes it.
  • the second region 122 is also referred to as a phase modulation region 122.
  • the phase difference imparted to the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 is, for example, 0 (that is, the same phase) and 2 ⁇ / 3.
  • the phase of the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 is advanced or delayed by 2 ⁇ / 3 with respect to the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121. That is, the phase difference of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light with respect to the + 1st order diffracted light is set to three types of 0, 2 ⁇ / 3, and ⁇ 2 ⁇ / 3. Note that how to change the phase difference will be described later. Note that the phase difference to be applied is not limited to 2 ⁇ / 3 but may be other values.
  • the transmission member 141 is a phase plate in which a magnesium fluoride film is formed on a quartz substrate.
  • the first region 121 is a quartz substrate
  • the second region 122 is a quartz substrate and a magnesium fluoride film formed on the quartz substrate.
  • the optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 in the second region 122 is longer than the optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 in the first region 121 and is different.
  • the transmitting member 141 is not limited to a phase plate in which a magnesium fluoride film is formed on a quartz substrate, but may be a phase plate in which a silicon dioxide film is formed on a quartz substrate. It may be polished to form regions of different thickness on a quartz substrate.
  • the transmissive member 141 has a circular shape when viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, and a rotation axis AX4 is set at the center thereof.
  • the second region 122 and the first region 121 are different regions of the transmission member 141.
  • the first region 121 is the first region 121.
  • the second region 122 is distributed in a range of less than 180 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4.
  • the first region 121 is distributed in a range exceeding 180 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4.
  • the second region 122 is distributed in a range of 40 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4.
  • the thickness in the second region 122 is substantially the same as the thickness in the first region 121.
  • the optical distance in the second region 122 is different from the optical distance in the first region 121 because the refractive index of the second region 122 is different from the refractive index of the first region 121.
  • the refractive index of the second region 122 is larger than the refractive index of the first region 121, and the optical distance in the second region 122 is longer than the optical distance in the first region 121.
  • the transmissive member 141 adjusts the phase difference between the light beam transmitted through the second region 122 and the light beam transmitted through the first region 121 so that the phase of the light beam passing through the second region 122 is delayed.
  • FIG. 6 is a view showing light fluxes from the shutter member 131 to the illumination area LA when the rotation angles of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are predetermined rotation angles.
  • a part of light rays Ca of the + 1st order diffracted light passes through the first passage portion ATa of the shutter member 131 and enters the second region 122 of the transmission member 141.
  • the light beam Ca passes through the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141, is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, and enters the objective lens 154.
  • the light beam Ca is refracted by the objective lens 154 and is incident on the specimen SP disposed in the illumination area LA.
  • the partial light ray Cb of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light passes through the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131 and enters the first region 121 of the transmission member 141.
  • the light ray Cb passes through the first region 121 of the transmissive member 141, is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, and enters the objective lens 154.
  • the light beam Cb is refracted by the objective lens 154 and enters the sample SP so as to intersect the light beam Ca of the + 1st order diffracted light on the sample SP arranged in the illumination area LA.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 interfere on the sample SP (so-called two-beam interference), and interference fringes are formed on the sample SP.
  • the intensity distribution on the conjugate plane OS3 (illumination area LA) of the interference fringes between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light has an intensity corresponding to the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the illumination area LA.
  • the intensity distribution in the conjugate plane OS3 (illumination area LA) of the interference fringes can be controlled by controlling the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the illumination area LA.
  • the illuminating device 10 forms interference fringes by two-beam interference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light. Therefore, the illumination device 10 blocks the 0th-order diffracted light transmitted without being diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 at any position between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA.
  • the 0th-order diffracted light A3 from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151 and reaches the intersection A0 between the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the conjugate plane OS1. Condensate.
  • the distance between the spot light collected by the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 and the spot light collected by the 0th order diffracted light is the position of the conjugate plane OS1 in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152. It becomes maximum at.
  • the illumination device 10 blocks the 0th-order diffracted light by the light blocking member disposed at or near the conjugate plane OS1. Specifically, the illumination device 10 according to the present embodiment blocks the 0th-order diffracted light by the shutter member 131.
  • the rotation axis AX3 and the surrounding area AS0 are the light shielding portion AS. This area AS0 is arranged in the vicinity of the intersection A0 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131.
  • the 0th-order diffracted light is collected at the intersection A0 between the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the conjugate plane OS1 regardless of the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111. That is, regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 and the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111, the optical path of the 0th-order diffracted light is shielded by the shutter member 131.
  • Such a light blocking member that blocks the 0th-order diffracted light is arranged at any position in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA so that the optical path of the 0th-order diffracted light does not overlap with the optical path of ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light. May be.
  • the number of such light shielding members may be one or plural. Further, such a light shielding member may be provided on one or more members disposed between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA. For example, one or both of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 may be provided. It may be provided.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase applying unit 120, respectively, to control the direction and phase of the interference fringes. Specific examples of the direction and phase of the interference fringes controlled by the drive control unit 160 will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the direction of the interference fringes by ⁇ 1st order diffracted light is changed in three directions, and the three kinds of phase differences of ⁇ 1st order diffracted light (that is, ⁇ 1st order diffracted light with respect to + 1st order diffracted light)
  • the phase difference is changed to three types) and nine times of imaging are executed.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a first positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 includes the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131.
  • the phase provision part 120 is provided with the permeation
  • the drive control unit 160 controls the direction and phase of the interference fringes by driving the transmission member 141 of the phase applying unit 120 and the shutter member 131 of the light beam generation unit 110 in conjunction with each other.
  • + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L1.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L2, and the periodic structure in the third direction D3.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the above and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L3. That is, the diffraction grating 111 emits three sets of diffracted light, that is, diffracted light L1, diffracted light L2, and diffracted light L3.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is diffracted light.
  • a ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is denoted as L1-1, and is denoted as diffracted light L1-2.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is described as diffracted light L2-1
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is described as diffracted light L2-2
  • the third direction The + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure of D3 is referred to as diffracted light L3-1
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure of the third direction D3 is referred to as diffracted light L3-2.
  • the rotation angle of the reference point P around the rotation axis AX3 (or the optical axis AX1 coaxial with the rotation axis AX3) is The rotation angle of the shutter member 131 will be described.
  • the position shown in FIG. 7 on the transmissive member 141 is set as a reference point Q, and the rotation angle of the reference point Q around the rotation axis AX4 (or the optical axis AX1 coaxial with the rotation axis AX4) is The rotation angle of the transmissive member 141 will be described.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 is an example of the first light beam
  • the diffracted light L1-2 is an example of the second light beam. That is, the diffraction grating 111 as the light beam generation unit 110 generates a first light beam and a second light beam from the light emitted from the light source 101.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7A (positions where the rotation angle is 0 ° and the rotation angle is 180 °). Accordingly, when the reference of the rotation angle (that is, the rotation angle of 0 °) is set as shown in FIG. 4 described above, the diffraction incident on the position of the rotation angle of 0 ° among the six diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 111. The light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° passes through the second passage portion ATb.
  • the remaining four diffracted lights that is, the diffracted light L2-1 incident on the rotation angle of 60 ° and the diffracted light L2 incident on the rotation angle of 240 °. -2, the diffracted light L3-1 incident on the rotation angle 120 ° and the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° are respectively shielded by the light shielding portion of the shutter member 131. Further, the 0th-order diffracted light is shielded by the shutter member 131 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 and the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111 as described above.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7A (position of the rotation angle 0 °).
  • the diffracted lights L1-1 passes through the second region 122, the phase of which is modulated, and the diffracted light L1- 1 '.
  • the other diffracted light L1-2 passes through the first region 121.
  • the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 is an example of the first light beam
  • the diffracted light L1-2 is an example of the second light beam. That is, the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux.
  • an angle formed by two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the first passage portion ATa is defined as a central angle ⁇ a of the first passage portion ATa, and an angle formed by the two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the second passage portion ATb.
  • the central angle ⁇ b of the second passage portion ATb is used.
  • the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131 each have a central angle (center angle ⁇ a and center angle ⁇ b) of 20 °. It is an opening.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 continuously without stopping.
  • the shutter member 131 when the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated, it enters the position of the rotation angle 0 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 0 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 20 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 that continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle 180 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 0 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 20 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb.
  • the second region 122 of the transmission member 141 is distributed in a range from ⁇ 20 ° to 20 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4 with the position of the reference point Q being 0 °.
  • the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 0 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 20 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of ⁇ 20 °.
  • the incident diffracted light L1-1 continues to pass through the second region 122.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle ⁇ 20 ° to the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 20 ° It continues to pass through one area 121.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141.
  • the drive controller 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 until the rotation angle reaches 20 ° from the rotation angle 0 °. Rotation is driven until the rotation angle reaches 20 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 0 ° and until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 20 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.
  • the drive control unit 160 changes the phase of the interference fringes without changing the direction of the interference fringes illuminated in the illumination area LA from that in FIG. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160 starts from the state of FIG. 7A described above so that the second region 122 of the transmission member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7B (position where the rotation angle is 120 °). 141 is continuously rotated.
  • the drive control unit 160 displays the shutter member 131 so that the light flux passing through the shutter member 131 remains unchanged from the state of FIG. 7A to the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2. 7 is continuously rotated from the state of (a).
  • the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 both pass through the first region 121. Accordingly, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after passing through the transmission member 141. This is different from the case shown in FIG. 7 (a), that is, the case where there is a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 after passing through the transmitting member 141, and the presence or absence of the phase difference. To do.
  • the shutter member 131 when the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated, it enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 200 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 that continues continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle 180 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 200 ° is the first diffracted light L1-2. Continue to pass through the passage part ATa.
  • the transmission member 141 when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 140 °. Both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° continue to pass through the first region 121.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 simultaneously. Specifically, the drive control unit 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 from the rotation angle of 180 ° to the rotation angle of 200 °. Until the rotation angle reaches 140 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 200 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa and the first region 121.
  • the drive control unit 160 turns the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle, and further rotates by 60 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG.
  • the case where only rotational driving is performed will be described.
  • the drive controller 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG.
  • one diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated.
  • the phase-modulated diffracted light L1-2 ′ is obtained.
  • the phase applying unit 120 provides a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase. This is because, in the case shown in FIG. 7A, that is, the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 that have passed through the transmitting member 141 have a phase difference between the two diffracted lights. It is different in that the relationship is reversed.
  • the relationship between the shutter member 131, the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 °, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° is shown in FIG. Since it is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 160 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 200 °. The diffracted light L1-1 continues to pass through the first region 121, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° continues to pass through the second region 122. At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 simultaneously.
  • the drive controller 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 until the rotation angle reaches 20 ° from the rotation angle 0 °. Until the rotation angle reaches 200 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the first region 121 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 0 ° and until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 20 °.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the second region 122.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to generate the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2. Changes the region of the transmissive member 141 when the light passes through the transmissive member 141. Thereby, the direction of the interference fringes generated by the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 does not change, and the phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 changes in three ways. That is, the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to change the phase difference when the direction of the interference fringes is a predetermined direction.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a second positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization with each other so that the state shown in FIG. 7A is changed to the state shown in FIG. 8A. That is, the drive control unit 160 controls the direction of the interference fringes by rotationally driving the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization. Specifically, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle.
  • the angle of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is displaced counterclockwise by 60 °, and the direction of the interference fringes is displaced counterclockwise by 60 °.
  • the diffraction is performed while the shutter member 131 continuously rotates by 20 ° after the diffracted light starts to pass through the passing portion AT.
  • the light continues to pass through the passing part AT.
  • the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated so that the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 60 ° and the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 80 °.
  • the incident diffracted light L2-1 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa.
  • the diffracted light L2-2 incident on the rotation angle 240 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 60 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 80 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb. Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 60 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 40 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 80 °.
  • the diffracted light L2-1 continues to pass through the second region 122.
  • the diffracted light L2-2 incident on the rotation angle 240 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 40 ° to the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 80 ° is the first diffracted light L2-2. It continues to pass through the region 121.
  • the diffracted light L2-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 80 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 60 °. Subsequently, the diffracted light L2-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a third positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization with each other so that the state shown in FIG. 9A is changed to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the rotation angle of each diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 111 does not change. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are driven to rotate counterclockwise and the rotation angle changes from 60 ° to 120 °, the light flux passing through the shutter member 131 is changed to FIG. The diffracted light L2-1 and diffracted light L2-2 shown in FIG.
  • the angle of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is further displaced counterclockwise by 60 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG.
  • the angle of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is further displaced counterclockwise by a rotation angle of 60 °, so that the direction of the interference fringes is further displaced counterclockwise by a rotation angle of 60 °.
  • the drive control unit 160 controls the direction of the interference fringes.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to change the direction of the interference fringes when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
  • the shutter member 131 continuously 20 During the rotation, the diffracted light continues to pass through the passing portion AT. Specifically, the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated so that the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 120 ° and the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 140 ° until the reference angle P reaches the rotation angle 120 °.
  • the incident diffracted light L3-1 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa.
  • the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 120 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 140 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb.
  • the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 120 ° from the time when the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 140 °.
  • the diffracted light L3-1 continues to pass through the second region 122.
  • the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle 140 ° is the first diffracted light L3-2. It continues to pass through the region 121. Therefore, the diffracted light L3-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 140 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 120 °. Subsequently, the diffracted light L3-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.
  • FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a control sequence by the drive control unit 160 of the present embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate in synchronization with the exposure operation (or imaging operation) of the imaging unit 210.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 at a predetermined rotational speed in accordance with the exposure operation of the imaging unit 210.
  • the rotation angle of the passing portion AT of the shutter member 131 changes, and the diffracted light L1, the diffracted light L2, and the diffracted light L3 sequentially pass through the shutter member 131.
  • the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT having a predetermined size. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 continues to rotate, the diffracted light continuously passes for a predetermined period.
  • the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT having a central angle of 20 °
  • the transmission member 141 includes a second region 122 having a central angle of 40 °. I will explain it.
  • an angle formed by two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is defined as a central angle of the second region 122.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate by matching the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 with the rotation speed of the transmission member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 0 ° at timing T1, which is the first exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. That is, at timing T1, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 0 ° as shown in FIG. To drive.
  • the drive control unit 160 starts the shutter member from the timing T1 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 becomes a rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′ that is the first exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. 131 is continuously rotated. That is, the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′. As described above, since the shutter member 131 includes the passage portion AT having a central angle of 20 °, the diffracted light L1 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T1 and the timing T1 ′.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 is 0 ° at the timing T1. That is, at timing T1, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 0 ° as shown in FIG. To drive. Further, the drive controller 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 becomes a rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 '.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T1 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′.
  • the transmissive member 141 includes the second region 122 having a central angle of 40 °. For this reason, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the first region 121 between timing T1 and timing T1 '. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T1 and timing T1 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T1 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 60 ° at timing T2, which is the second exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T2, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 such that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 60 ° as shown in FIG. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 from timing T2 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 80 ° at timing T2 ′ that is the second exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T2 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 80 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L2 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T2 and the timing T2 '.
  • the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T1 'so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 60 ° at timing T2. That is, at timing T2, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 60 ° as shown in FIG. The transmission member 141 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T2 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 80 ° at timing T2 '.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the transmission member 141 stop the rotation of the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 80 ° at the timing T2 ′. Is driven to rotate.
  • the diffracted light L2-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L2-2 passes through the first region 121 between the timing T2 and the timing T2 '. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T2 and timing T2 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA.
  • the direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T2 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 120 ° at timing T3, which is the third exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T3, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 such that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 120 ° as shown in FIG. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping.
  • the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T2 'so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 120 ° at timing T3. That is, at timing T3, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 120 ° as shown in FIG.
  • the transmission member 141 is rotationally driven without stopping.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 to rotate at a constant rotational speed, so that the diffracted lights L1 to L3 are emitted from the shutter member.
  • the timing of passing through 131 can be synchronized with the timing of the imaging unit 210 performing the exposure operation.
  • the timings T3 to T7 differ from the controls at timings T1 to T3 in that the drive control unit 160 performs control to rotate the transmission member 141 at a speed lower than the rotation speed of the shutter member 131.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 at a speed that is 1 ⁇ 4 of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131.
  • the drive control unit 160 performs the shutter member 131 between the timing T3 ′ and the timing T4 ′ that is the fourth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210 in the same manner as the control between the timings T1 to T3 described above.
  • Drive Specifically, the drive control unit 160 continuously moves the shutter member 131 from the timing T3 so that the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 is 140 ° at the timing T3 ′ that is the third exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To rotate.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T3 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 140 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L3 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T3 and the timing T3 ′. At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T3 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 125 ° at timing T3 ′.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the transmission member 141 stop the rotation of the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 125 ° at the timing T3 ′. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L3-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L3-2 passes through the first region 121 between the timing T3 and the timing T3 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T3 and timing T3 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 from the timing T3 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 180 ° at the timing T4. That is, the drive control unit 160 at the timing T4 that is the fourth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210, as shown in FIG. 7B, the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 and the position of the rotation angle of 180 °. So that the shutter member 131 is rotated without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131. Further, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 to rotate continuously low from timing T4 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 200 ° at timing T4 ′, which is the fourth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T4 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 200 °. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L1 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T4 and the timing T4 ′. At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T3 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 135 ° at timing T4.
  • the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 and the position of the rotation angle 135 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141.
  • Rotation drive Furthermore, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T4 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 140 ° at timing T4 ′. That is, at timing T4 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle of 140 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate.
  • both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T4 and the timing T4 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T4 and timing T4 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T4 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 240 ° at timing T5 which is the fifth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T5, the drive controller 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 180 ° as shown in FIG. 8B. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 from timing T5 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 260 ° at timing T5 ′ that is the fifth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincide with the position of the rotation angle 260 ° at the timing T5 ′ so that the rotation of the shutter member 131 is not stopped. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L2 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T5 and the timing T5 ′.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T4 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 150 ° at timing T5. That is, at timing T4, the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 and the position of the rotation angle 150 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmissive member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T5 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 155 ° at timing T5 ′. That is, at timing T5 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle 155 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate. Thus, both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T5 and the timing T5 ′. Therefore, during exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T5 and timing T5 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T5 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 300 ° at timing T6, which is the sixth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T6, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 300 ° as shown in FIG. 9B. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 from the timing T6 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 320 ° at the timing T6 ′ that is the sixth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T6 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 320 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L3 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T6 and the timing T6 ′. At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 from timing T5 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 165 ° at timing T6.
  • the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 and the position of the rotation angle of 165 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141.
  • Rotation drive Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T6 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 170 ° at timing T6 ′. That is, at timing T6 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle of 170 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T6 and the timing T6 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T6 and timing T6 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.
  • the control operation of the drive control unit 160 at timings T7 to T9 ' is the same as the control at timings T1 to T3'. That is, at the timings T7 to T9 ′, the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are synchronized with each other except that the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light emitted at the timings T1 to T3 ′ is opposite to each other. This is the same in that it is controlled. Therefore, detailed description of the control operation of the drive control unit 160 at the timings T7 to T9 'is omitted.
  • the calculation unit 220 generates nine images of the specimen SP on which nine types of interference fringes having different directions and phase differences are projected, and generates a super-resolution image from the nine images generated by a known method. To do.
  • the rotation drive of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160 is continued without stopping until the imaging unit 210 captures all nine types of specimen SP images.
  • the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160 causes the calculation unit 220 to perform super-resolution from the nine images. In other words, it can be continued until an image is generated.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to set one of the first light beam and the second light beam to the first region 121 (reference).
  • the incident position in the first region 121 (reference phase region) and the incident position in the phase modulation region 122 are changed while the other light beam is incident on the phase modulation region 122.
  • the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
  • the drive control unit 160 rotates the light beam generation unit 110 about the optical axis of the illumination optical system 150 (interference optical system) as a rotation center, so that the first along the optical axis.
  • the direction of the interference fringes is controlled by changing the optical path between the light beam and the second light beam.
  • the observation apparatus 1 drives the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120, and controls the drive control unit 160 that controls at least one of the direction of interference fringes and the phase difference.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam selecting unit and the phase applying unit 120 to cause at least one of the first light beam and the second light beam to enter the phase applying unit 120 and to cause the phase applying unit 120 to enter the phase applying unit 120.
  • the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the previous phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
  • the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate continuously. Accordingly, the drive control unit 160 performs control to switch the diffracted lights L1 to L3 emitted to the objective lens 154 to each other. At this time, the drive control unit 160 switches the diffracted light without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141.
  • an interference fringe in a predetermined direction that interferes with a predetermined phase difference is formed on the sample SP to capture an image of the sample SP.
  • the drive control unit 160 included in the observation apparatus 1 can switch the phase difference of the beam bundle to be interfered and the direction of the interference fringes without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141, and thus the shutter member 131. In addition, since it does not take time to stop and accelerate the transmission member 141, it is possible to shorten the time until the generation of the super-resolution image, and to efficiently observe the specimen SP.
  • the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141 while changing the rotation speed of the transmissive member 141. Specifically, the drive controller 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 at the same time between the timings T1 and T3 with the rotational speed of the shutter member 131 and the rotational speed of the transmission member 141 matched. In addition, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate at a speed that is 1 ⁇ 4 of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 and T7. The drive control unit 160 drives to rotate continuously with the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 and the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 matched between the timings T7 to T9 ′.
  • the drive controller 160 changes the direction of the interference fringes by ⁇ first-order diffracted light into the three directions diffracted by the periodic structure of the first direction D1 to the third direction D3, and the interference fringes in each direction.
  • the phase difference of the ⁇ first-order diffracted light is changed into three types: fast phase, in-phase, and slow phase. That is, the drive control unit 160 changes nine combinations of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference of the diffracted light.
  • the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is not variable, in order to change the direction of the interference fringe and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways, at least one of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 is used. There is a period during which the rotation of the motor stops.
  • the drive control unit 160 of the present embodiment determines the phase difference of the diffracted light and the direction of the interference fringes due to the diffracted light while rotating and driving at a variable speed without stopping the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141. Can be changed. Therefore, according to the observation apparatus 1, since the super-resolution image can be generated without stopping the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141, the specimen SP can be observed efficiently.
  • the case where only the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is variable has been described.
  • the drive control unit 160 may change the rotation speed of at least one of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141. The above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the rotational speeds of both the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 may be variable.
  • FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are perspective views showing modifications of the shutter member 131, respectively.
  • each planar shape of 1st passage part ATa and 2nd passage part ATb is circular.
  • the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb increase in size in the direction orthogonal to the radial direction, and then decrease after the size becomes maximum.
  • the planar shape of each of the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb is a fan shape.
  • the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb are disposed up to the outer periphery of the shutter member 131, respectively.
  • the shape of the first passage portion ATa and the shape of the second passage portion AT can be changed as appropriate.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a lighting device 10 according to a modification.
  • FIG. 12 shows components disposed in the optical path from the light source device 100 to the shutter member 131.
  • the illumination device 10 of the present modification includes a wave plate 140A that changes the polarization state of the light beam generated by the diffraction grating 111 to linearly polarized light.
  • the illumination optical system 150 generates interference fringes by converting the light beam, which is converted into linearly polarized light by the wave plate 140A, into S-polarized light in the vicinity of the specimen SP shown in FIG.
  • the light emitted from the light source device 100 is, for example, first linearly polarized light whose polarization direction is a direction PD1 shown in FIG.
  • the illumination device 10 converts the first linearly polarized light whose direction is the direction PD1 into second linearly polarized light having a polarization direction different from that of the first linearly polarized light, and illuminates the illumination area LA with the illumination light IL of the second linearly polarized light.
  • the polarization direction of the second linearly polarized light is, for example, a direction PD2 shown in FIG.
  • the first linearly polarized light is the linearly polarized light shown in FIG. 1 and the like
  • the second linearly polarized light is S-polarized light with respect to the specimen SP.
  • the illumination device 10 includes a quarter wavelength plate 142 and a quarter wavelength plate 143.
  • the shutter member 131 is disposed in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the relay lens 152 shown in FIG.
  • the quarter wavelength plate 142 is disposed in the optical path between the light source device 100 and the diffraction grating 111.
  • the quarter wave plate 142 has a fixed rotation angle relative to the polarization direction of the first linearly polarized light from the light source.
  • the fast axis or slow axis (axis AXa shown in FIG. 12) of the quarter wavelength plate 142 is arranged at an angle of about 45 ° with respect to the polarization direction of the first linearly polarized light.
  • Light from the light source 101 is converted into circularly polarized light through the quarter-wave plate 142 and is incident on the diffraction grating 111.
  • the quarter wave plate 143 is at least a part of the wave plate 140B.
  • the relative rotation angle of the quarter-wave plate 143 with respect to the shutter member 131 is fixed.
  • the shutter member 131 can rotate, and the quarter-wave plate 143 can rotate in synchronization with the shutter member 131.
  • the quarter wavelength plate 143 is disposed at a position away from the shutter member 131 and is driven by a drive unit different from the shutter member 131.
  • the drive unit of the quarter-wave plate 143 is controlled by the drive control unit 160 shown in FIG. 1 so that the relative rotation angle between the quarter-wave plate 143 and the passage part AT of the shutter member 131 is maintained.
  • the quarter wave plate 143 is driven to rotate.
  • the fast axis or slow axis (axis AXb shown in FIG. 12) of the quarter-wave plate 143 is relative to the line connecting the center of the first passage portion ATa and the center of the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131. It is arranged at an angle of about 45 °.
  • the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is circularly polarized light, is transmitted through the quarter-wave plate 143, and is converted to S-polarized light with respect to the specimen SP.
  • the driving unit of the shutter member 131 may include at least a part of the driving unit of the quarter wavelength plate 143. Further, the quarter wavelength plate 143 may be attached to the shutter member 131, and the relative position to the shutter member 131 may be fixed.
  • the illumination device 10 includes the linear polarization unit that changes the polarization state of the light beam generated by the light beam generation unit 110 to linearly polarized light. Further, the illumination optical system 150 (interference optical system) generates an interference fringe by converting the light beam, which has been linearly polarized by the linearly polarized light portion, into S-polarized light in the vicinity of the sample. The illumination device 10 can improve the contrast of the interference fringes in the vicinity of the sample by using the S-polarized light beam.
  • FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1a according to the second embodiment
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffraction grating 111 according to this embodiment.
  • the observation device 1a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the illumination device 10a.
  • the observation apparatus 1a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the illumination apparatus 10a includes a diffraction grating 112 having a periodic structure in one direction instead of a plurality of directions.
  • +1 is diffracted by the diffraction grating 112 along the periphery of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, not the passage portion AT (the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb) having a shape like the shutter member 131.
  • the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a shutter member 133 having a circular opening passing portion (not shown) that allows the passage of the first-order diffracted light and the minus first-order diffracted light is provided.
  • the illumination device 10a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the illumination device 10a includes a drive control unit 160a that does not rotate the shutter member 133 but rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141.
  • the zero-order diffracted light from the diffraction grating 112 is shielded by the shutter member 133.
  • the shape of the passage portion (not shown) of the shutter member 133 is not limited to the annular opening, and it is only necessary to have a passage portion that shields the 0th-order diffracted light and allows the ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light to pass.
  • the diffraction grating 112 has a periodic structure in one direction, and divides an incident light bundle into a plurality of light bundles including a first light bundle and a second light bundle distributed along one direction. To do. That is, the diffraction grating 112 is a one-way diffraction grating having one diffraction direction.
  • the diffraction grating 112 can rotate around the rotation axis AX5.
  • the rotation axis AX5 of the diffraction grating 112 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the diffraction grating 112 is rotated by torque supplied from a drive unit (not shown) such as an electric motor.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 a to rotate the diffraction grating 112.
  • the drive control unit 160 a can control the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the position of the spot light on the conjugate plane OS1 formed by condensing each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 112.
  • FIG. 15 the spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light is point-symmetric with respect to the position D2 of the spot of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light and the position D2 of the spot of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light are maintained in point symmetry with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 as the diffraction grating 112 rotates, while maintaining the optical axis AX1. Changes to rotate around.
  • the transmission member 141 is rotatable as described in the first embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160 a can control the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112 and the drive unit of the transmission member 141.
  • the transmitting member 141 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1, and the spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light and the position D2 of the spot of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light shown in FIG. Correspond. That is, the position of the spot on the transmission member 141 changes according to the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141.
  • the transmission member 141 has a second region 122 and a first region 121.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141, so that the region where the spot light of the diffracted light is formed in the transmissive member 141 is the second region 122 and the first region. 121 can be switched.
  • the drive control unit 160a may set the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that both the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light and the spot light of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light are arranged in the first region 121. Can be controlled.
  • the drive control unit 160a includes the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light is formed in the second region 122 and the spot light of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light is formed in the first region 121. Relative rotation angle can be controlled. Since the optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 differs between the second region 122 and the second region, the drive control unit 160a controls the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light that have passed through the transmission member 141. it can. A specific example in which the drive control unit 160a controls the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the diffraction grating 112 so that the diffracted light is incident on the positions shown in FIG. 16A (for example, the positions having a rotation angle of 0 ° and a rotation angle of 180 °).
  • the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 ° is transmitted through the second region 122 and the phase thereof is modulated.
  • the modulated diffracted light L1-1 ′ is obtained.
  • the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase.
  • the drive control unit 160a does not change the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112, and rotates the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle by 90 °.
  • a case of rotational driving will be described.
  • the drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG.
  • the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 are both transmitted through the first region 121. Therefore, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after transmission through the transmission member 141.
  • This is different from the case shown in FIG. 16A, that is, the case where there is a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 after being transmitted through the transmitting member 141, in terms of the presence or absence of the phase difference. To do.
  • the drive control unit 160a turns the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle, and further rotates by 90 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG. The case where only rotational driving is performed will be described.
  • the drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG.
  • the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated, and becomes a diffracted light L1-2 'after phase modulation.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first region 121.
  • the phase applying unit 120 provides a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase. This is because the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 transmitted through the transmitting member 141 are the phase difference between the diffracted light and the phase-advanced phase as shown in FIG. It is different in that the relationship is reversed.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the direction of interference fringes controlled by the drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the direction of the interference fringes by rotating and driving the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization. Specifically, the drive controller 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the traveling direction of the light beam. At this time, the position at which each diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 112 enters the transmission member 141 changes as the diffraction grating 112 rotates.
  • the position of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is further counterclockwise. (See FIG. 17C).
  • the position of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise, so that the direction of the interference fringes is further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the direction of the interference fringes.
  • the drive controller 160a changes the direction and phase of the interference fringes by continuously rotating the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 described above without stopping them.
  • the illumination device 10a includes a diaphragm member 155 that blocks light so that light from the relay lens 152 does not enter the illumination area LA during a period in which diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 112 is generated in a direction other than a desired direction. ing.
  • the diaphragm member 155 can change one or both of the shape and size of the region through which the light from the relay lens 152 passes.
  • the drive controller 160a can block the light from the relay lens 152 at an arbitrary timing by controlling the diaphragm member 155.
  • the drive controller 160a may block the light from the relay lens 152 by the diaphragm member 155 so that the light from the relay lens 152 does not enter the illumination area LA at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 is arranged at a rotation angle other than desired. it can. Accordingly, the drive control unit 160a can block diffracted light in a diffraction direction other than desired so as not to enter the illumination area LA. As described above, the diaphragm member 155 can block at least a part of the light bundles generated by the diffraction grating 112 during the change of the interference fringes by the drive control unit 160a.
  • the drive control unit 160a receives the light from the relay lens 152 at the timing when the spot light formed by condensing the diffracted light on the transmission member 141 is arranged across the second region 122 and the first region 121. This light can be blocked by the diaphragm member 155 so as not to enter the illumination area LA. That is, the diaphragm member 155 can block at least a part of the light bundles generated by the diffraction grating 112 during the change from the phase difference by the drive control unit 160a.
  • the illumination optical system 150 includes a light shielding unit that shields at least a part of the light bundles generated by the light bundle generation unit 110 during the change of the direction and phase of the interference fringes by the drive control unit 160a. I have.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 at a predetermined timing according to the exposure operation of the imaging unit 210, and continuously rotates and drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping. As a result, the direction and phase of the interference fringes are changed.
  • the direction of the interference fringes is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 'and the diffracted light L1-2 that have a phase difference.
  • the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase will be described.
  • the drive control unit 160a changes the combinations of the interference fringe direction and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways.
  • the drive controller 160a rotationally drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that the diffracted light is incident on the positions shown in FIG. 17A (for example, the positions of the rotation angle 0 ° and the rotation angle 180 °). To do.
  • the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 ° is transmitted through the second region 122 and the phase thereof is modulated.
  • the modulated diffracted light L1-1 ′ is obtained.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 to enter the illumination area LA.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1- at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are displaced counterclockwise by 120 ° by this rotational drive. 2 enters the illumination area LA. Next, the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light. L1-2 is made incident on the illumination area LA. In this way, the drive control unit 160a changes the positions where the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 having a phase difference from each other enter the illumination area LA in three ways.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to block the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and continuously stops the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping them. Rotational drive. At this time, the drive control unit 160a increases the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 faster than the rotation speed of the diffraction grating 112, and continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping both. To drive.
  • the drive control unit 160a displaces the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so as to displace the transmission member 141 by 210 degrees counterclockwise while the diffraction grating 112 is displaced 120 degrees counterclockwise. Rotation drive.
  • the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are in the state shown in FIG. That is, the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 incident on the transmissive member 141 are both transmitted through the first region 121. Therefore, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after transmission through the transmission member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 to enter the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops neither the diffraction grating 112 nor the transmissive member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160a rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 at the same rotational speed.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1- 2 enters the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops neither the diffraction grating 112 nor the transmissive member 141. To continuously rotate.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1. -2 is incident on the illumination area LA. In this way, the drive control unit 160a changes the positions at which the diffracted light L1-1 and diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase are incident on the illumination area LA in three ways.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and continuously stops the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 without stopping them. To rotate. At this time, the drive control unit 160a increases the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 faster than the rotation speed of the diffraction grating 112, and continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping both. To drive.
  • the drive control unit 160a displaces the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so as to displace the transmission member 141 by 210 degrees counterclockwise while the diffraction grating 112 is displaced 120 degrees counterclockwise. Rotation drive.
  • the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are in the state shown in FIG. That is, the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated to become a diffracted light L1-2 ′ after phase modulation. Further, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first region 121.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′ to enter the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously.
  • the drive control unit 160a rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 at the same rotational speed.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1- 2 'is made incident on the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously.
  • the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1.
  • -2 ′ is incident on the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a changes the positions where the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′ having a phase difference from each other enter the illumination area LA in three ways.
  • the calculation unit 220 generates nine images of the specimen SP on which nine types of interference fringes having different directions and phase differences are projected, and generates a super-resolution image from the nine images generated by a known method. To do.
  • the rotation drive of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160a is continued without stopping until the imaging unit 210 captures all nine types of specimen SP images.
  • the rotational drive of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160a is performed by the calculation unit 220 from the nine images. In other words, it can be continued until an image is generated.
  • the observation apparatus 1a of the present embodiment includes the drive control unit 160a that drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to control the direction and phase of interference fringes.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 of the observation apparatus 1a has a periodic structure in one direction, and diffracts the incident light beam into a plurality of light beams including a first light beam and a second light beam distributed in one direction.
  • a grid 112 is provided.
  • the drive control unit 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 (light bundle splitting unit) and the phase applying unit 120 to cause at least one of the first light bundle or the second light bundle to enter the phase providing unit 120, and By changing the position on the phase applying unit 120 to be incident, the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
  • the observation apparatus 1a has the same effect as the observation apparatus 1.
  • the drive control unit 160a changes the direction of the interference fringes without stopping the rotation of the diffraction grating 112.
  • a driving unit particularly immediately before or after the rotation stops, For example, when a driving unit (not shown) vibrates due to backlash or the like, the vibration of the driving unit is transmitted to the diffraction grating 112, and the diffraction grating 112 vibrates.
  • the diffraction grating 112 particularly on the sample SP due to a vibration component along the rotation direction of the diffraction grating 112 or a vibration component in a direction parallel to the incident surface of the diffraction grating 112 on which the light beam from the light source 101 is incident. Since the contrast (S / N ratio) of the interference fringes formed in the image quality decreases, the resolution of the super-resolution image decreases. Therefore, in order to capture an image in which interference fringes with sufficient contrast are formed on the specimen SP, it is necessary to wait for an imaging operation by the imaging unit 210 until vibration of a driving unit (not shown) is stabilized. Causes a problem that the time required for imaging becomes long.
  • the drive control unit 160a included in the observation apparatus 1a can switch the direction of the diffracted light without stopping the rotation of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141, so that the degree of vibration generated in the diffraction grating 112 can be reduced. Can do. Therefore, according to the observation apparatus 1a, the time for generating the super-resolution image by eliminating the waiting time until the vibration of the diffraction grating 112 is stabilized while maintaining the resolution of the super-resolution image at a desired resolution. Can be shortened. Further, as described above, the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated without stopping. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, there is no time for stopping or accelerating, which occurs when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are stopped and rotated intermittently. The time for generating an image can be shortened.
  • the drive control unit 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 to rotate by changing the rotation speed of the transmission member 141.
  • the drive control unit 160a changes the phase difference of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light with respect to the interference fringes in each direction while changing the direction of the interference fringe due to the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in three directions. Change to 3 types of phases. That is, the drive control unit 160a changes the combinations of the interference fringe direction and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways.
  • the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is not variable, in order to change the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference of the diffracted light in these nine ways, at least one of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 is used. There is a period during which the rotation of the motor stops. In this case, if the diffraction grating 112 is stopped, the resolution of the super-resolution image is lowered due to the vibration, so that the imaging operation may be waited until the vibration is stabilized. In this case, the imaging time becomes long. Occurs. On the other hand, if the transmitting member 141 is stopped, it takes time to stop and accelerate.
  • the drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment changes the phase difference of the diffracted light and the direction of the interference fringes due to the diffracted light while rotating and rotating the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without changing the speed. Can be made. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, it is possible to shorten the time for generating the super-resolution image.
  • the case where only the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is made variable has been described. However, if the drive control unit 160a makes the rotation speed of at least one of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 variable, The effects described above can be achieved.
  • the drive control unit 160a continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 until the image of the specimen SP necessary for generating a super-resolution image is captured.
  • the transmission member 141 may be intermittently rotated only by continuously rotating only the diffraction grating 112.
  • the drive controller 160a changes the direction of the interference fringes formed on the sample SP and changes the phase difference of the interference fringes (the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light). At least one of them may be controlled so as to temporarily stop the transmissive member 141.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an illumination device 10a according to this modification.
  • the illumination device 10 a includes a light shielding member 158 arranged between the light guide member 102 and the collimator 103 of the light source device 100.
  • the light shielding member 158 is variable in one or both of the shape and size of the region through which light passes.
  • the drive control unit 160a can control the light shielding member 158 similarly to the diaphragm member 155 of FIG.
  • the drive controller 160a can block the light from the light source 101 by the light blocking member 158 so that the light from the light source 101 does not enter the illumination area LA at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 is arranged at a rotation angle other than desired. That is, the light shielding member 158 can suppress the diffracted light having a diffraction direction other than the desired light from entering the illumination area LA.
  • the drive control unit 160a prevents the light from the light source 101 from entering the illumination area LA at the timing when the spot light of the diffracted light on the transmission member 141 is arranged across the second area 122 and the first area 121. In addition, this light can be blocked by the light blocking member 158. That is, the light shielding member 158 can suppress the diffracted light having a phase difference other than that desired from being incident on the illumination area LA.
  • the light shielding member 158 when the light shielding member 158 is arranged at a position where the size of the spot light of the light from the light source 101 is smaller than the size of the spot light on the conjugate plane OS2, for example, the light shielding member 158 can be reduced in size. .
  • the light shielding member 158 may be disposed at any position in the optical path between the light source 101 and the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 210.
  • the drive control unit 160a may prevent the imaging unit 210 from detecting light from the specimen SP that is illuminated at a timing when one or both of the phase difference and the diffraction direction of the diffracted light are in a state other than desired.
  • the shutter 210 may be controlled.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the light beam generation unit 110.
  • the beam bundle generator 110 includes a base member 114 and a plurality of diffraction gratings 112 attached to the base member 114.
  • the base member 114 is rotatable around the rotation axis AX6.
  • the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 are arranged so as to surround the rotation axis AX6.
  • Each of the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 has a circular shape when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114.
  • the rotation axis AX6 is arranged non-coaxially with the optical axis AX1.
  • the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 include a first diffraction grating 113a, a second diffraction grating 113b, and a third diffraction grating 113c.
  • the first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b, and the third diffraction grating 113c are arranged at a pitch of about 120 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX6.
  • the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a, the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b, and the diffraction direction of the third diffraction grating 113c are set to different directions on the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis AX6.
  • the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a forms an angle of about 120 ° with the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b.
  • the diffraction direction of the third diffraction grating 113c forms an angle of about 120 ° with the second diffraction grating 113b in the direction opposite to the direction of the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a with respect to the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b. ing.
  • the first diffraction grating 113a is rotatable on the base member 114 around the center of the first diffraction grating 113a viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114. Similarly to the first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b and the third diffraction grating 113c can rotate on the base member 114.
  • the first diffraction grating 113 a, the second diffraction grating 113 b, and the third diffraction grating 113 c are all connected to one gear 115.
  • the first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b, and the third diffraction grating 113c rotate in conjunction with each other as the gear 115 rotates.
  • the gear 115 rotates in parallel with the base member 114.
  • the exposure area PE shown in FIG. 19 is an area through which light emitted from the collimator 103 is transmitted. The position of the exposure region PE does not change even when the base member 114 rotates.
  • each diffraction grating sequentially passes through the exposure region PE. To do.
  • the gear 115 does not rotate.
  • the first diffraction grating 113a rotates around the rotation axis AX6 as the base member 114 rotates, and the diffraction direction changes.
  • the rotation speed of the gear 115 is set according to the rotation speed of the base member 114 so as to cancel the change in the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a due to the rotation around the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114. Therefore, the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a does not change even when the base member 114 and the gear 115 rotate.
  • the diffraction directions of the second diffraction grating 113b and the third diffraction grating 113c do not change even when the base member 114 and the gear 115 rotate.
  • the diffraction direction changes according to the rotation of the diffraction grating 112. For this reason, when the diffraction grating 112 is continuously rotated, if the exposure time of the imaging unit 210 is increased, the contrast of the interference fringes formed on the specimen SP may be reduced, and the resolution of the super-resolution image may be reduced. There is sex.
  • the drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment rotationally drives the diffraction grating 113 without stopping it. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, the standby time until the vibration of the diffraction grating 113 is stabilized can be eliminated, so that the time for generating a super-resolution image can be shortened.
  • 20 (a) to 20 (c) are diagrams showing modifications of the phase applying unit 120, respectively.
  • a member having a property of transmitting light is disposed in the second region 122, and the first region 121 is a vacuum region or a gas region.
  • the second region 122 is a vacuum region or a gas region, and light is transmitted to the first region 121.
  • a member having the property of transmitting may be arranged.
  • the first area 121 may be a liquid area such as water or oil.
  • the transmissive member 141 adjusts the phase difference between the light flux that passes through the second region 122 and the light flux that passes through the first region 121 so that the phase of the light flux that passes through the second region 122 advances.
  • the phase applying unit 120 may advance or relatively delay the phase of the light beam transmitted through the second region 122 with respect to the phase of the light beam transmitted through the first region 121.
  • the shape of the second region 122 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 is a circular shape.
  • the shape of the second region 122 and the shape of the first region 121 can be set to arbitrary shapes.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1a according to this modification.
  • the observation apparatus 1a of this modification is different from the configuration of FIG. 13 in the light beam generation unit 110.
  • the light beam generation unit 110 includes an optical path rotating member 159.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 is disposed in the optical path between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141.
  • the optical path of the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 112 is rotated around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 by the optical path rotating member 159 instead of rotating the diffraction grating 112.
  • FIG. 22 is a view showing an optical path rotating member 159 according to this modification.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 is an optical member called a dove prism or an image rotating prism.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 includes an incident side end surface STI on which light from the diffraction grating 112 is incident, an inner surface SI on which light incident from the incident side end surface STI is reflected, and light reflected on the inner surface SI to the outside of the optical path rotating member 159. And an exit-side end face STO that exits.
  • the incident-side end surface STI is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the exit-side end surface STO is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 symmetrically with respect to the incident-side end surface STI with respect to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the optical path rotating member 159 in a plane perpendicular to these three planes is an isosceles trapezoid. In this isosceles trapezoid, one of the two oblique sides corresponds to the incident side end surface STI, the other of the two oblique sides corresponds to the emission side end surface STO, and the bottom corresponds to the inner surface SI.
  • the diffracted light that has entered the incident side end surface STI from the diffraction grating 112 is refracted by the incident side end surface STI and is incident on the inner surface SI.
  • the diffracted light from the incident side end surface STI is reflected by the inner surface SI by satisfying the total reflection condition at the inner surface SI.
  • the diffracted light reflected by the inner surface SI enters the emission-side end surface STO, is refracted by the emission-side end surface STO, and is emitted to the outside of the optical path rotating member 159.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 can rotate around the rotation axis AX7.
  • the rotation axis AX7 is disposed on a line connecting the center of the incident side end face STI and the center of the emission side end face STO.
  • the rotation axis AX7 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 is rotated by torque supplied from the driving unit.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160a shown in FIG. 21 to rotate the optical path rotating member 159.
  • the drive control unit 160a can control the rotation angle of the optical path rotation member 159 by controlling the drive unit.
  • the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2 are point symmetric with respect to the rotation axis AX7.
  • the inner surface SI of the optical path rotating member 159 is perpendicular to the plane including the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2.
  • Such a rotation angle of the optical path rotation member 159 is appropriately referred to as a reference angle.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 When the optical path rotating member 159 is at the reference angle, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2 between the transmission member 141 and the optical path rotating member 159 shown in FIG. Compared with the optical path between the diffraction grating 112 and the optical path rotating member 159, the positional relationship is reversed with respect to a plane passing through the rotation axis AX7 and parallel to the inner surface SI.
  • the optical path rotating member 159 When the optical path rotating member 159 is rotated around the rotation axis AX7, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2 between the diffraction grating 112 and the optical path rotating member 159 are rotated. It rotates about the rotation axis AX7 while maintaining a point-symmetrical positional relationship with respect to AX7. As a result, the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the spot light of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2 formed in the transmitting member 141 shown in FIG. 21 are point-symmetric with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the drive controller 160a controls the rotation angle of the optical path rotating member 159, thereby controlling the position of the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the spot light of the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light L1-2 formed on the transmission member 141. You can control the position.
  • FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1b according to the third embodiment.
  • the observation apparatus 1b of the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the specimen SP is illuminated with a three-beam interference fringe generated using zero-order diffracted light in addition to ⁇ first-order diffracted light.
  • interference fringes A interference fringes by two light beams of ⁇ 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light and 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light and ⁇ 1st order diffracted light
  • An interference fringe (interference fringe B) having a period twice that of the interference fringe A is formed and present.
  • the interference caused by the 0th-order diffracted light and the 1st-order diffracted light, and the 0th-order diffracted light and the -1 diffracted light order are not symmetrical with respect to the optical axis.
  • the combined wave of these diffracted lights becomes interference fringes having a structure not only in the direction perpendicular to the optical axis but also in the optical axis direction on the specimen SP.
  • the specimen structured and illuminated with the three-beam interference fringes is modulated in the optical axis direction in addition to the modulation in the direction perpendicular to the same optical axis as the embodiment structured and illuminated with the two-beam interference fringes. Therefore, when a modulated image is acquired and an appropriate image calculation is performed, a so-called sectioning image with improved resolution in the optical axis direction can be obtained.
  • Non-Patent Document 2 MGLGustafsson, DAAgard, JWSedat, “Doubling the lateral resolution of wide-field fluorescence microscopy using structured illumination”, Proceedings of the SPIE-The International Society for Optical Engineering (2000) vol.3919, vol.3919 50. (Non-Patent Document 2).
  • This observation apparatus 1b acquires five types of phase-modulated images in each of the three directions of the interference fringes described above and a total of 15 phase-modulated images. The configuration of the observation apparatus 1b will be described.
  • the observation device 1b includes an illumination device 10b and a drive control unit 160b.
  • the illuminating device 10 b includes a diffraction grating 111 as the light beam generation unit 110.
  • This diffraction grating 111 is a three-way diffraction grating, like the diffraction grating 111 provided in the observation apparatus 1 described above.
  • the diffraction grating 111 has a fixed relative position to the illumination optical system 150 and is provided so as not to rotate.
  • the illumination device 10 b includes a shutter member 132 as the light beam generation unit 110 and a transmission member 144 as the phase applying unit 120. An example of the configuration of the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is a plan view of the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1.
  • the shutter member 132 is arranged in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA with the rotation axis AX3 of the shutter member 132 and the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 being coaxial. ing.
  • the shutter member 132 can rotate around the rotation axis AX3, and rotates around the rotation axis AX3 by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the shutter member 132.
  • the drive control unit 160b can control the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 by controlling the drive unit.
  • the shutter member 132 is the same as the shutter member 131 described above in that it has a passage portion AT through which light can pass and a light shielding portion AS that blocks light.
  • the shutter member 132 is different from the shutter member 131 described above in that the shutter member 132 includes a third passage portion ATc in addition to the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb.
  • the third passage portion ATc is a circular opening around the rotation axis AX3 with the rotation axis AX3 as the center.
  • the shutter member 131 described above does not have an opening corresponding to the third passage portion ATc, and shields the 0th-order diffracted light incident from the diffraction grating 111.
  • the shutter member 132 allows the 0th-order diffracted light to pass therethrough without being blocked by the third passage portion ATc. Similarly to the shutter member 131 described above, the shutter member 132 allows ⁇ first-order diffracted light to pass through the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb. That is, according to the shutter member 132, 0th-order diffracted light can be transmitted in addition to ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light.
  • the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb are arranged in the order of the light shielding portion, the second passage portion ATb, the light shielding portion, and the first passage portion ATa in the counterclockwise direction from the reference point P on the shutter member 132.
  • the transmitting member 144 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1.
  • the transmission member 144 is a plate-like member, the surface on which light from the light source 101 is incident is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, and the rotation axis AX4 of the transmission member 144 and the optical axis.
  • AX1 is arranged coaxially.
  • the transmission member 144 can rotate around the rotation axis AX4, and rotates around the rotation axis AX4 by torque supplied from a drive unit such as an electric motor.
  • This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the transmission member 144.
  • the drive control unit 160b can control the rotation angle of the transmission member 144 by controlling the drive unit.
  • the transmissive member 144 is similar to the transmissive member 141 described above in that it includes a first region 121 (reference phase region) and a second region 122 (phase modulation region). .
  • the transmission member 144 is different from the transmission member 141 described above in that the second region 122 includes four regions each having a thickness different from that of the first region 121.
  • the four regions included in the second region 122 are an A region 122a, a B region 122b, a C region 122c, and a D region 122d.
  • the central angles of the first region 121 and the A region 122a to D region 122d are each 60 °.
  • the first region 121 and the A region 122a are arranged at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. Further, the B region 122b and the D region 122d are disposed at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. Further, the C region 122c includes the periphery of the rotation axis AX4, and the two C regions 122c are arranged at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. These regions are arranged in the order of C region 122c, B region 122b, A region 122a, C region 122c, D region 122d, and first region 121 in the counterclockwise direction from the reference point Q on the transmission member 144. .
  • the thicknesses of the A region 122a to the D region 122d are set as follows. That is, the thickness of the A region 122a is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the A region 122a is equivalent to 16 ⁇ / 5.
  • the thickness of the B region 122b is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the B region 122b is equivalent to 14 ⁇ / 5.
  • the thickness of the C region 122c is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the C region 122c is equivalent to 8 ⁇ / 5.
  • the thickness of the D region 122d is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the D region 122d is equivalent to 2 ⁇ / 5.
  • 25 and 26 are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of the positional relationship between the light beam generation unit and the phase providing unit.
  • the drive controller 160b sets the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 and the rotation angle of the transmission member 144 without stopping the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144, and 18 of patterns 1 to 18 shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. Change the street.
  • the drive control unit 160b matches the rotation speed of the shutter member 132 with the rotation speed of the transmission member 144, and causes the 0th-order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light to pass through the shutter member 132.
  • the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are continuously driven to rotate.
  • the 0th-order diffracted light is transmitted through the C region 122 c of the transmission member 144 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 and the rotation angle of the transmission member 144.
  • description of the 0th-order diffracted light passing through the C region 122c of the transmissive member 144 is omitted.
  • the drive controller 160b sets the shutter member 132 to a rotation angle of 0 ° and the transmission member 144 to a rotation angle of 0 ° (Pattern 1: Time T10 to Time T10 ′ in FIG. 27).
  • ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light in the first direction D1 passes through the shutter member 132.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light passes through the first region 121 (region A1 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144.
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (region A2 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144.
  • the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 132 in the pattern 1 is referred to as the origin position of the shutter member 132.
  • the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 144 in the pattern 1 is referred to as the origin position of the transmission member 144.
  • the drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P 60 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position with respect to the shutter member 132 to a rotation angle 60 °, and the transmission member 144 sets the reference point Q counterclockwise from the origin position.
  • the rotation angle is 80 ° (pattern 2: time T11 to time T11 ′ in FIG. 27).
  • ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2 passes through the shutter member 132.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the first region 121 (region A3 where a spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144.
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (the region A4 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144.
  • the drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P by 120 ° counterclockwise from the origin position for the shutter member 132 at a rotation angle of 120 °, and the transmission member 144 sets the reference point Q counterclockwise from the origin position.
  • the rotation angle is 160 ° rotated by 160 ° (Pattern 3: Time T12 to Time T12 ′ in FIG. 27).
  • ⁇ 1st-order diffracted light in the third direction D3 passes through the shutter member 132.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the first region 121 (region A5 where a spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144.
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (the region A6 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144.
  • the drive control unit 160b transmits the + 1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1 to the third direction D3 through the first region 121 and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light through the A region 122a. Further, the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are driven to rotate. As a result, in the patterns 1 to 3, the phase difference of the ⁇ first-order diffracted light becomes ⁇ 16 ⁇ / 5 (that is, 4 ⁇ / 5). The phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is ⁇ 8 ⁇ / 5 (ie, 2 ⁇ / 5).
  • the phase difference between the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is ⁇ 8 ⁇ / 5 (ie, 2 ⁇ / 5). That is, in the patterns 1 to 3, the drive control unit 160b changes the direction of the interference fringes in three ways without changing the phase difference of each diffracted light.
  • the drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P 180 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position for the shutter member 132 and rotates the reference point Q 240 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position for the transmission member 144.
  • the rotation angle is set to 240 ° (pattern 4: time T13 to time T13 ′ in FIG. 27).
  • ⁇ 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 passes through the shutter member 132.
  • the + 1st order diffracted light passes through the D region 122a of the transmissive member 144.
  • the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light passes through the B region 122b of the transmission member 144.
  • the phase difference of the ⁇ first-order diffracted light is ⁇ 12 ⁇ / 5 (that is, 8 ⁇ / 5).
  • the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is ⁇ 6 ⁇ / 5 (that is, 4 ⁇ / 5).
  • the phase difference between the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is ⁇ 6 ⁇ / 5 (ie, 4 ⁇ / 5).
  • the + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the D region 122a of the transmission member 144, and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the B of the transmission member 144.
  • the region 122b is transmitted.
  • the drive control unit 160b has the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 to the third direction D3 in the D region 122a, the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light in the B region 122b,
  • the shutter member 132 and the transmissive member 144 are rotationally driven so as to transmit each. That is, in the patterns 4 to 6, the drive control unit 160b changes the direction of the interference fringes in three ways without changing the phase difference of each diffracted light.
  • the imaging unit 210 does not capture a phase-modulated image.
  • the drive control unit 160b causes the light shielding member (for example, the diaphragm member 155).
  • the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are rotationally driven while shielding the diffracted light. Thereby, interference fringes due to unnecessary diffracted light can be prevented from being formed on the specimen SP (in other words, unnecessary diffracted light can be prevented from entering the imaging unit 210).
  • the drive controller 160b can generate 15 different interference fringe states by changing the phase difference of the diffracted light to 5 ways and the direction of the interference fringes to 3 ways. Specifically, the following phase difference can be given to each diffracted light in each direction of the interference fringes.
  • the observation apparatus 1b can change the phase difference of the diffracted light in five ways while changing the direction of the interference fringes in three ways when the three light beams interfere with each other.
  • a modulated image obtained by imaging the interference fringes is acquired and appropriate image calculation is performed, a so-called sectioning image with improved resolution in the optical axis direction is obtained. That is, according to the observation apparatus 1b, the resolving power in the optical axis direction can also be improved.
  • the time until a super-resolution image is generated can be shortened as in the first embodiment described above.
  • the observation apparatus 1b may rotate the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 144 in the direction opposite to the above-described direction. Further, this observation apparatus 1b may include a diffraction grating 112 that is a one-way diffraction grating as in the second embodiment described above, instead of the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131.
  • the diffraction grating 112 is a unidirectional diffraction grating, like the diffraction grating 112 provided in the observation apparatus 1a described above, and rotates by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the diffraction grating 112.
  • the drive control unit 160 b can control the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112.
  • the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 144 may be continuously rotated, or only the diffraction grating 112 may be continuously rotated.
  • the observation device 1b of the present embodiment can change the phase difference of the diffracted light in five ways while changing the direction of the interference fringes in three ways when the three light beams interfere with each other. it can. In this case, similarly to the second embodiment described above, it is possible to shorten the time until a super-resolution image is generated.
  • the diffraction grating 111 is a three-way diffraction grating having three diffraction directions, but may be a two-way diffraction grating having two diffraction directions, or may have many diffraction directions having four or more diffraction directions. It may be a directional diffraction grating.
  • the diffraction grating 111 may be tilted non-perpendicularly with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the shutter member 131 (or the shutter member 132; the same in the following description) is disposed in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1, but the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination region Between LA, the optical paths of a plurality of light beams diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 may be arranged at any position where they do not overlap each other.
  • the shutter member 131 may be disposed in the optical path between the conjugate plane OS1 and the relay lens 152, may be disposed between the diffraction grating 111 and the projection lens 151, or may be the objective lens 154.
  • FIG. 1 the shutter member 131 (or the shutter member 132; the same in the following description) is disposed in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1, but the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination region Between LA, the optical paths of a plurality of light beams diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 may be arranged at any
  • the optical axis may be disposed at or near the position of a plane optically conjugate with the conjugate plane OS1.
  • the spot size of each diffracted light is minimized at the position of the conjugate plane OS1 in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152, and the interval between the spots of the diffracted light is between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152.
  • the maximum is obtained at the position of the conjugate plane OS1. Therefore, the closer the shutter member 131 is to the conjugate plane OS1 in the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, the easier it is for the light beam to be selected by the shutter member 131.
  • the shutter member 131 does not have to be disk-shaped, and for example, the outer shape of the illumination optical system 150 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 is triangular, rectangular, other polygons, ellipse, straight line, or free curve. Or any of the shapes enclosed by both sides may be sufficient.
  • the shutter member 131 may not be plate-shaped, and may be block-shaped, for example.
  • the rotation axis of the shutter member 131 may be inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.
  • the transmissive member 141 (or the transmissive member 144; the same in the following description) is plate-shaped, but may be block-shaped.
  • the transmissive member 141 may be disposed at any position where the optical paths of the plurality of diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 111 do not overlap with each other in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA.
  • each of the second region 122 and the first region 121 is one, but one or both of the second region 122 and the first region 121 are at different positions in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4.
  • a plurality of arranged regions may be included.
  • the number of regions having different optical distances in the transmissive member 141 is two, but may be three or more. Further, in FIG. 5 and the like, the transmission member 141 has been described as being disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the transmission member 141 may be disposed at a position where the + 1st order diffracted light and the ⁇ 1st order diffracted light are incident on different positions on the transmission member 141, for example, between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152. It suffices to be arranged at the position of
  • the transmission member 141 may be provided with a center-of-gravity adjustment unit so that the center of gravity of the transmission member 141 is disposed on the rotation axis AX4.
  • This center-of-gravity adjustment unit may be, for example, a film provided at a position where diffracted light from the diffraction grating 111 is not incident.
  • the shape of the transmission member 141 may be adjusted so that the center of gravity of the transmission member 141 is disposed on the rotation axis AX4, and a notch, a hole, or the like may be formed for adjusting the center of gravity.
  • the light source device 100 is a part of the illumination devices 10, 10a, and 10b. However, at least a part of the light source device 100 may be an external device of the illumination devices 10, 10a, and 10b.
  • the light source 101 is not limited to a laser diode, and can be various light emitting elements such as a semiconductor laser, a solid-state laser, and a gas laser.
  • the light blocking member that prevents the formation of interference fringes due to unnecessary diffracted light on the specimen SP may not be the diaphragm member 155, for example, a laser shutter (not shown) provided in the light source device 100.
  • various members can be used for light shielding.
  • it may not be a light shielding member, for example, you may stop the laser generation of the light source device 100 temporarily.
  • each lens is drawn by one member in FIG. 1 etc., the number of lens members which each lens has may be one, and may be two or more.
  • the illumination optical system 150 may include a cut lens obtained by cutting a part of a rotationally symmetric lens member, or may include a rotationally asymmetric free-form surface lens.
  • the illumination optical system 150 is a refractive optical system that does not include a reflective member having power, but a catadioptric optical system that includes both a lens member having power and a reflective member having power. It may be. Further, the illumination optical system 150 may be a reflective optical system that includes a reflective member having power and does not include a lens member having power.
  • the reflecting member having power is, for example, a concave mirror or a convex mirror.
  • the illumination optical system 150 may include one or both of a reflecting member having no power and a transmitting member having no power in any of the refractive system, the catadioptric system, and the reflecting system. Good.
  • the drive control units 160 and 160b switch between the rotation operation and the stop operation of the transmission member 141 while continuously rotating the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 ′ to T7.
  • the drive control units 160 and 160b rotate the shutter member 131 continuously between timings T3 ′ to T7, and set the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 to a rotation speed slower than the rotation speed of the shutter member 131.
  • the transmission member 141 may be controlled to be continuously rotated. More specifically, the drive control units 160 and 160b change the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 to 1/3 of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 ′ to T7, and sets the transmission member 141. You may control so that it may rotate continuously.
  • the drive control units 160 and 160b control the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in accordance with the exposure timing controlled by the imaging control unit 212
  • the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the drive control units 160 and 160b may be configured to control the exposure timing of the imaging unit 210.
  • each part with which each control part (The drive control part 160, 160a, 160b, the imaging control part 212, the calculating part 220) with which observation apparatus 1, 1a, 1b of each embodiment mentioned above is provided is implement
  • the drive control parts 160, 160a, and 160b of each above-mentioned embodiment are provided in the illuminating devices 10, 10a, and 10b, they do not need to be provided in the illuminating devices 10, 10a, and 10b.
  • the observation device 1, 1a, 1b it may be outside the illumination device 10, 10a, 10b, or inside an arithmetic unit (not shown) outside the observation device 1, 1a, 1b.
  • the calculation unit 220 may also be inside a calculation device (not shown) outside the observation devices 1, 1a, 1b.
  • the drive control units 160, 160a, 160b and the calculation unit 220 may be inside a common calculation device (not shown) outside the observation devices 1, 1a, 1b.
  • each control part with which the observation apparatus 1, 1a, 1b is comprised is comprised with memory and CPU (central processing unit), and the program for implement
  • the function may be realized by.
  • a program for realizing the functions of the control units included in the observation apparatuses 1, 1a, and 1b is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is read into a computer system and executed. By doing so, you may perform the process by each part with which a control part is provided.
  • the “computer system” includes an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices.
  • the “computer system” includes a homepage providing environment (or display environment) if a WWW system is used.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a storage device such as a flexible medium, a magneto-optical disk, a portable medium such as a ROM or a CD-ROM, and a hard disk incorporated in a computer system.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” dynamically holds a program for a short time like a communication line when transmitting a program via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line.
  • a volatile memory in a computer system serving as a server or a client in that case, and a program that holds a program for a certain period of time are also included.
  • the program may be a program for realizing a part of the functions described above, and may be a program capable of realizing the functions described above in combination with a program already recorded in a computer system.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
  • Microscoopes, Condenser (AREA)

Abstract

A lighting device wherein a sample is lighted by interference fringes, the device provided with: a light bundle generating unit that generates first and second light bundles from light that is emitted from a light source; a phase imparting unit that creates a phase difference between the first light bundle and the second light bundle; an interference optical system that interferes with the first light bundle and the second light bundle and generates interference fringes; and a drive control unit that drives the light bundle generating unit and the phase imparting unit and that alters the phase difference or the direction of the interference fringes or both.

Description

照明装置、観察装置及び観察方法Illumination device, observation device, and observation method

 本発明は、照明装置、観察装置及び観察方法に関する。 The present invention relates to an illumination device, an observation device, and an observation method.

 顕微鏡装置において、光学系の分解能を越えた観察を可能とする超解像顕微鏡がある。この超解像顕微鏡の一形態として、空間変調された照明光により標本を照明して変調画像を取得し、その変調画像に含まれる変調成分を除去(復調)することにより、標本の超解像画像を生成する構造化照明顕微鏡(SIM:Structured Illumination Microscopy)が知られている(例えば、特許文献1を参照)。この手法においては、照明光束に位相変調を与えて撮像された複数の画像に基づいて超解像画像を生成し、光学系の分解能を越えた観察を可能とする。 There is a super-resolution microscope that enables observation beyond the resolution of the optical system in a microscope apparatus. As a form of this super-resolution microscope, the specimen is illuminated with spatially modulated illumination light to obtain a modulated image, and the modulation component contained in the modulated image is removed (demodulated), thereby super-resolution of the specimen. A structured illumination microscope (SIM) that generates an image is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this method, a super-resolution image is generated based on a plurality of images picked up by applying phase modulation to the illumination light beam, thereby enabling observation beyond the resolution of the optical system.

米国特許第6239909号明細書US Pat. No. 6,239,909

M.G.L.Gustafsson, D.A.Agard, J.W.Sedat ”Doubling the lateral resolution of wide-field fluorescence microscopy using structured illumination” ,Proceedings of the SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering (2000) vol.3919, p.141-50.M.G.L.Gustafsson, D.A.Agard, J.W.Sedat ”Doubling the lateral resolution of wide-field fluorescence microscopy using structured illumination, Proceedings of the SPIE-The International Society for 919Optical Engineering.

 しかしながら、上記のような顕微鏡装置によっては、超解像画像を生成する時間を短縮することができないという問題があった。 However, there is a problem that the time for generating a super-resolution image cannot be shortened depending on the above-described microscope apparatus.

 本発明は、上記問題を解決すべくなされたもので、その目的は、超解像画像を生成する時間を短縮することができる照明装置、観察装置及び観察方法を提供することにある。 The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide an illumination device, an observation device, and an observation method that can shorten the time for generating a super-resolution image.

 [1]本発明の一実施形態は、標本を干渉縞で照明する照明装置において、光源から射出された光から、第1光線束と第2光線束とを生成する光線束生成部と、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とに位相差を付与する位相付与部と、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とを干渉させて干渉縞を生成する干渉光学系と、前記光線束生成部及び前記位相付与部をそれぞれ駆動して、前記干渉縞の方向と前記位相差との少なくとも一方を変化させる駆動制御部とを備えることを特徴とする照明装置である。 [1] One embodiment of the present invention is an illumination device that illuminates a specimen with interference fringes, a light beam generation unit that generates a first light beam and a second light beam from light emitted from a light source; A phase applying unit that provides a phase difference between the first light bundle and the second light bundle; an interference optical system that generates interference fringes by causing the first light bundle and the second light bundle to interfere; and An illumination device comprising: a drive control unit that drives each of the bundle generation unit and the phase applying unit to change at least one of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference.

 [2]また、本発明の一実施形態は、上述の照明装置と、前記照明装置が干渉縞で照明した標本の像を結像させる結像光学系と、前記結像光学系によって結像された前記標本の像を撮像する撮像部と、前記撮像部が撮像した前記像に基づいて、前記標本の画像を生成する演算部とを備える観察装置である。 [2] Further, according to an embodiment of the present invention, an image is formed by the above-described illumination device, an imaging optical system that forms an image of a sample illuminated by the interference fringe by the illumination device, and the imaging optical system. An observation apparatus comprising: an imaging unit that captures an image of the specimen; and a calculation unit that generates an image of the specimen based on the image captured by the imaging unit.

 [3]また、本発明の一実施形態は、上述の照明装置が干渉縞で標本を照明することと、前記照明によって照明された標本の像を結像させる結像光学系によって結像された前記標本の像を撮像することと、前記撮像によって撮像された前記標本の像に基づいて、前記標本の画像を生成する演算手順とを有する観察方法である。 [3] Further, according to an embodiment of the present invention, the above-described illumination device illuminates the specimen with interference fringes and is imaged by an imaging optical system that forms an image of the specimen illuminated by the illumination. An observation method comprising: capturing an image of the sample; and a calculation procedure for generating an image of the sample based on the image of the sample captured by the imaging.

 この発明によれば、超解像画像を生成する時間を短縮することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to shorten the time for generating the super-resolution image.

本発明の第1の実施形態に係る観察装置を示す概要図である。1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an observation apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 照明光学系の光軸の方向から見た回折格子の平面図である。It is the top view of the diffraction grating seen from the direction of the optical axis of an illumination optical system. 照明光学系の光軸の方向から見たシャッター部材の平面図である。It is a top view of the shutter member seen from the direction of the optical axis of an illumination optical system. 回折格子で回折した各回折光が共役面で集光して形成されたスポット光の共役面上における位置を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the position on the conjugate surface of the spot light formed by converging each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating on the conjugate surface. 透過部材を示す図である。It is a figure which shows a transmissive member. シャッター部材から照明領域に至る光束を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the light beam from a shutter member to an illumination area | region. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の第1の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the 1st positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の第2の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the 2nd positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の第3の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the 3rd positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 駆動制御部による制御シーケンスの一例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the control sequence by a drive control part. シャッター部材の変形例を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the modification of a shutter member. 変形例の照明装置の概略構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the illuminating device of a modification. 第2の実施形態に係る観察装置を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the observation apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 回折格子を示す図である。It is a figure which shows a diffraction grating. 各回折光の共役面におけるスポットの位置を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the position of the spot in the conjugate plane of each diffracted light. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 駆動制御部が制御する干渉縞の方向の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the direction of the interference fringe which a drive control part controls. 照明装置の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of an illuminating device. 光線束生成部の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of a light beam production | generation part. 位相付与部の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of a phase provision part. 観察装置の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of an observation apparatus. 光路回転部材の変形例を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the modification of an optical path rotation member. 第3の実施形態に係る観察装置を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the observation apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. シャッター部材及び透過部材をそれぞれ光軸の方向から見た平面図である。It is the top view which looked at the shutter member and the transmissive member from the direction of the optical axis. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の位置関係の第1の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st example of the positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 光線束生成部及び位相付与部の位置関係の第2の例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd example of the positional relationship of a light beam production | generation part and a phase provision part. 駆動制御部による制御シーケンスの一例を示すシーケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the control sequence by a drive control part.

 [第1の実施形態]
 以下、図面を参照して、本発明の第1の実施形態を説明する。
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施形態に係る観察装置を示す概要図である。本実施形態の観察装置1とは、例えば、生体の細胞などの標本SPを観察する顕微鏡装置である。
[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an observation apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The observation apparatus 1 of this embodiment is a microscope apparatus that observes a specimen SP such as a living body cell, for example.

 この観察装置1は、照明装置10、結像光学系200、撮像部210、及び演算部220を備える。照明装置10は、標本SPを干渉縞で照明する。結像光学系200は、照明装置10が干渉縞で照明した標本SPの像(干渉縞の像)を結像させる。撮像部210は、結像光学系200によって結像された標本SPの像を撮像する。演算部220は、撮像部210が撮像した像に基づいて、標本SPの画像を生成する。 The observation apparatus 1 includes an illumination device 10, an imaging optical system 200, an imaging unit 210, and a calculation unit 220. The illumination device 10 illuminates the specimen SP with interference fringes. The imaging optical system 200 forms an image of the specimen SP (interference fringe image) illuminated by the illumination device 10 with the interference fringes. The imaging unit 210 captures an image of the specimen SP imaged by the imaging optical system 200. The computing unit 220 generates an image of the specimen SP based on the image captured by the imaging unit 210.

 照明装置10は、所定の照明領域LA上に照明光ILにより干渉縞を形成する。標本SPは、照明領域LA上またはその近傍に配置される。すなわち、照明装置10は、標本SPを照明光ILで照明するとともに、標本SP上に干渉縞を形成する。 The illumination device 10 forms interference fringes on the predetermined illumination area LA with the illumination light IL. The specimen SP is arranged on or near the illumination area LA. That is, the illuminating device 10 illuminates the specimen SP with the illumination light IL and forms interference fringes on the specimen SP.

 本実施形態に係る照明装置10は、光源装置100、光線束生成部110、位相付与部120、照明光学系150、及び駆動制御部160を備える。光線束生成部110は、光源装置100から射出された光から、第1光線束と第2光線束とを生成する。図1に示す回折光LM1とは、第1光線束の一例である。図1に示す回折光LM2とは、第2光線束の一例である。位相付与部120は、第1光線束と第2光線束とに位相差を付与する。照明光学系150は、第1光線束と第2光線束とを照明領域LAにおいて干渉させて(いわゆる、2光束干渉)干渉縞を生成する。駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120のそれぞれを駆動して、干渉縞の方向と干渉縞の位相(つまり、第1光線束と第2光線束との位相差)とを制御する。この照明光学系150とは、干渉光学系の一例である。ここで、干渉縞の方向とは、照明領域LAに形成された干渉縞の光の強度分布において、光の強度が周期的に変化する方向を示す。 The illumination device 10 according to the present embodiment includes a light source device 100, a light beam generation unit 110, a phase adding unit 120, an illumination optical system 150, and a drive control unit 160. The light beam generation unit 110 generates a first light beam and a second light beam from the light emitted from the light source device 100. The diffracted light LM1 shown in FIG. 1 is an example of a first light beam. The diffracted light LM2 shown in FIG. 1 is an example of a second light beam. The phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux. The illumination optical system 150 generates interference fringes by causing the first light flux and the second light flux to interfere in the illumination area LA (so-called two-beam interference). The drive control unit 160 drives each of the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase imparting unit 120, and the interference fringe direction and the interference fringe phase (that is, the phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux) and To control. The illumination optical system 150 is an example of an interference optical system. Here, the direction of the interference fringes indicates a direction in which the light intensity periodically changes in the light intensity distribution of the interference fringes formed in the illumination area LA.

 本実施形態に係る光源装置100は、光源101、導光部材102、及びコリメータ103を含む。光源101は、例えばレーザダイオードなどの発光素子を含む。導光部材102は、例えば光ファイバーを含み、光源101からの光をコリメータ103へ導く。本実施形態において、導光部材102から光が射出される射出端面を二次光源として使用する、コリメータ103は、この二次光源から射出される光を平行光にする。 The light source device 100 according to the present embodiment includes a light source 101, a light guide member 102, and a collimator 103. The light source 101 includes a light emitting element such as a laser diode. The light guide member 102 includes, for example, an optical fiber, and guides light from the light source 101 to the collimator 103. In the present embodiment, the collimator 103 that uses an emission end face from which light is emitted from the light guide member 102 as a secondary light source makes the light emitted from the secondary light source parallel light.

 本実施形態に係る光線束生成部110は、回折格子111、及びシャッター部材131を含む。回折格子111は、光源装置100と照明光学系150との間の光路に配置されている。本実施形態において、光源101から射出されて回折格子111で回折した光を、適宜、照明光ILという。シャッター部材131は、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間の光路に配置されている。本実施形態に係る位相付与部120は、光源101からの光の少なくとも一部が透過する透過部材141を含む。透過部材141は、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間の光路に配置されている。この透過部材141とは、位相付与部120の一例である。なお、光線束生成部110、及び位相付与部120の詳細については後述する。 The light beam generation unit 110 according to the present embodiment includes a diffraction grating 111 and a shutter member 131. The diffraction grating 111 is disposed in the optical path between the light source device 100 and the illumination optical system 150. In the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light source 101 and diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is appropriately referred to as illumination light IL. The shutter member 131 is disposed on the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA. The phase applying unit 120 according to the present embodiment includes a transmission member 141 that transmits at least part of the light from the light source 101. The transmission member 141 is disposed on the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA. The transmitting member 141 is an example of the phase applying unit 120. Details of the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase applying unit 120 will be described later.

 本実施形態に係る照明光学系150は、複数のレンズ部材を含む、屈折系の光学系である。照明光学系150は、投影レンズ151、リレーレンズ152、絞り部材155、フィールドレンズ153、ダイクロイックミラー156、励起フィルター156a、バリアフィルター156b、及び対物レンズ154を含む。 The illumination optical system 150 according to the present embodiment is a refractive optical system including a plurality of lens members. The illumination optical system 150 includes a projection lens 151, a relay lens 152, a diaphragm member 155, a field lens 153, a dichroic mirror 156, an excitation filter 156a, a barrier filter 156b, and an objective lens 154.

 本実施形態において、投影レンズ151、リレーレンズ152、フィールドレンズ153、対物レンズ154の少なくとも1つは、所定の対称軸の周りで回転対称な形状のレンズ部材を含む。このようなレンズ部材としては、例えば、球面レンズ、あるいは非球面レンズが挙げられる。本実施形態において、照明光学系150が有する回転対称な形状のレンズ部材の対称軸を、適宜、照明光学系150の光軸AX1という。 In the present embodiment, at least one of the projection lens 151, the relay lens 152, the field lens 153, and the objective lens 154 includes a lens member having a rotationally symmetric shape around a predetermined symmetry axis. Examples of such a lens member include a spherical lens and an aspheric lens. In the present embodiment, the symmetry axis of the rotationally symmetric lens member included in the illumination optical system 150 is appropriately referred to as an optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.

 投影レンズ151は、導光部材102における光の射出端面の像を共役面OS1に形成する。また、回折格子111と共役な面を共役面OS2とする。共役面OS2には、回折格子111の中間像が形成される。共役面OS2と光学的に共役な面を共役面OS3とする。共役面OS2が回折格子111と光学的に共役であるので、共役面OS3は、回折格子111と光学的に共役である。照明装置10の照明領域LAは、共役面OS3上、または標本SP上に形成される干渉縞の合焦精度が許容範囲に収まるように共役面OS3の近傍に設定される。 The projection lens 151 forms an image of the light exit end face of the light guide member 102 on the conjugate plane OS1. A plane conjugate with the diffraction grating 111 is defined as a conjugate plane OS2. An intermediate image of the diffraction grating 111 is formed on the conjugate plane OS2. A plane optically conjugate with the conjugate plane OS2 is defined as a conjugate plane OS3. Since the conjugate plane OS2 is optically conjugate with the diffraction grating 111, the conjugate plane OS3 is optically conjugate with the diffraction grating 111. The illumination area LA of the illumination device 10 is set in the vicinity of the conjugate plane OS3 so that the focusing accuracy of the interference fringes formed on the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP is within an allowable range.

 絞り部材155は、いわゆる視野絞りであり、共役面OS2上またはその近傍に配置される。照明領域LAと光学的に共役な共役面OS2に絞り部材155が配置されていることから、照明領域LAの外形は、絞り部材155において照明光ILが通る通過領域の外形と相似になる。このように、絞り部材155は、照明領域LAの形状を規定する。 The diaphragm member 155 is a so-called field diaphragm, and is disposed on or near the conjugate plane OS2. Since the diaphragm member 155 is disposed on the conjugate surface OS2 optically conjugate with the illumination area LA, the outer shape of the illumination area LA is similar to the outer shape of the passage area through which the illumination light IL passes in the diaphragm member 155. Thus, the diaphragm member 155 defines the shape of the illumination area LA.

 本実施形態に係る照明光学系150は、落射照明系である。対物レンズ154は、照明光学系150の一部と結像光学系200の一部とを兼ねている。照明光学系150において、フィールドレンズ153から照明領域LAに至る光路は、ダイクロイックミラー156によって折り曲げられている。ダイクロイックミラー156は、フィールドレンズ153と対物レンズ154との間の光路に配置されている。ダイクロイックミラー156は、フィールドレンズ153からの光が入射する面が照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対して傾いている。ダイクロイックミラー156においてフィールドレンズ153からの光が入射する面は、フィールドレンズ153からの照明光ILの少なくとも一部が反射する特性を有する。フィールドレンズ153からダイクロイックミラー156に入射した光の少なくとも一部は、ダイクロイックミラー156で反射して進行方向が折れ曲がり、対物レンズ154を介して照明領域LAに入射する。 The illumination optical system 150 according to the present embodiment is an epi-illumination system. The objective lens 154 serves as both a part of the illumination optical system 150 and a part of the imaging optical system 200. In the illumination optical system 150, the optical path from the field lens 153 to the illumination area LA is bent by a dichroic mirror 156. The dichroic mirror 156 is disposed in the optical path between the field lens 153 and the objective lens 154. In the dichroic mirror 156, the surface on which the light from the field lens 153 is incident is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The surface on which light from the field lens 153 is incident on the dichroic mirror 156 has a characteristic that at least a part of the illumination light IL from the field lens 153 is reflected. At least a part of the light that has entered the dichroic mirror 156 from the field lens 153 is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, the traveling direction is bent, and enters the illumination area LA through the objective lens 154.

 本実施形態に係る結像光学系200は、対物レンズ154および結像レンズ157を含む。対物レンズ154および結像レンズ157は、共役面OS3又は標本SPの像を共役面OS4に形成する。共役面OS4は、共役面OS3又は標本SPを物体面としたときの像面に相当する。共役面OS4には、照明光ILで照明されている標本SPの像が形成される。本実施形態において、対物レンズ154と結像レンズ157の一方または双方は、所定の対称軸の周りで回転対称な形状のレンズ部材を含み、この対称軸を結像光学系200の光軸AX2という。結像光学系200の光軸AX2は、対物レンズ154の光軸と同軸であり、例えば、照明光学系150のうち投影レンズ151からフィールドレンズ153までの部分の光軸に対してほぼ垂直に設定される。 The imaging optical system 200 according to the present embodiment includes an objective lens 154 and an imaging lens 157. The objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157 form an image of the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP on the conjugate plane OS4. The conjugate plane OS4 corresponds to an image plane when the conjugate plane OS3 or the specimen SP is the object plane. An image of the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL is formed on the conjugate plane OS4. In the present embodiment, one or both of the objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157 includes a lens member having a rotationally symmetric shape around a predetermined symmetry axis, and this symmetry axis is called the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200. . The optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200 is coaxial with the optical axis of the objective lens 154. For example, the optical axis AX2 is set almost perpendicular to the optical axis of the illumination optical system 150 from the projection lens 151 to the field lens 153. Is done.

 本実施形態において、ダイクロイックミラー156は、対物レンズ154と結像レンズ157との間の光路に配置されており、照明光ILによって照明されている標本SPからの光の少なくとも一部が通過する特性を有する。ダイクロイックミラー156において標本SPからの光が入射する面は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と結像光学系200の光軸AX2のそれぞれに対し、例えば約45°の角度をなして、傾いている。照明光ILにより照明されている標本SPからの光は、対物レンズ154、ダイクロイックミラー156、及び結像レンズ157を介して、共役面OS4に入射する。本実施形態では、ダイクロイックミラー156は分光特性を有し、照明光ILの波長を含む波長帯は反射し、標本SPに含まれる蛍光物質によって発する蛍光の波長を含む波長帯は透過するような特性を有している。励起フィルター156aは、光源装置100および照明光学系150で発生する不要な自家蛍光を標本SPや結像光学系200へ導かないようにするための分光特性フィルターであり、照明光ILの波長を透過する分光特性を有している。バリアフィルター156bは、照明光ILがダイクロイックミラー156で反射し、標本SPを照明する際、一部不要に反射して蛍光に交じって結像光学系を進行しないようにするためのもので、照明光ILの波長帯に対しては光学濃度5以上の素子能力を有し、標本SPの蛍光波長を含む波長帯は高い透過率を有する。以上は一般的な蛍光顕微鏡における励起フィルター、ダイクロイックミラー、バリアフィルターの機能と同等である。 In the present embodiment, the dichroic mirror 156 is disposed in the optical path between the objective lens 154 and the imaging lens 157, and has a characteristic that at least part of the light from the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL passes. Have The surface of the dichroic mirror 156 on which the light from the specimen SP is incident is inclined at an angle of, for example, about 45 ° with respect to each of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200. Yes. The light from the specimen SP illuminated by the illumination light IL enters the conjugate plane OS4 via the objective lens 154, the dichroic mirror 156, and the imaging lens 157. In the present embodiment, the dichroic mirror 156 has spectral characteristics, such that the wavelength band including the wavelength of the illumination light IL is reflected, and the wavelength band including the wavelength of the fluorescence emitted by the fluorescent material included in the specimen SP is transmitted. have. The excitation filter 156a is a spectral characteristic filter for preventing unnecessary autofluorescence generated in the light source device 100 and the illumination optical system 150 from being guided to the specimen SP and the imaging optical system 200, and transmits the wavelength of the illumination light IL. Spectral characteristics. The barrier filter 156b is for preventing the illumination light IL from being reflected by the dichroic mirror 156 and partially irradiating the specimen SP so that it does not travel through the imaging optical system along with the fluorescence. The device has an optical capacity of 5 or more for the wavelength band of the light IL, and the wavelength band including the fluorescence wavelength of the specimen SP has a high transmittance. The above is equivalent to the functions of an excitation filter, a dichroic mirror, and a barrier filter in a general fluorescence microscope.

 本実施形態に係る撮像部210は、撮像素子211、及び撮像制御部212を含む。撮像素子211は、CCDセンサー、CMOSセンサーなどのイメージセンサーを含む。撮像素子211は、複数のフォトダイオードが配列された受光面と、複数のフォトダイオードから信号を読み出す読出回路とを含む。撮像素子211の受光面は、標本SPが配置される照明領域LAと光学的に共役な共役面OS4に配置される。撮像素子211の受光面は、結像光学系200の光軸AX2の方向において、焦点深度の範囲内で共役面OS4からずれていてもよい。撮像制御部212は、撮像素子211の読出回路を制御し、撮像タイミングなどを制御するとともに、読出回路からの信号をA/D変換して演算部220に転送する。演算部220は、撮像素子211から転送される信号に基づいて、標本SPの画像を生成するための演算を行う。具体的には、駆動制御部160により制御された、複数の方向の各方向に対して複数の位相(つまり、第1光線束と第2光線束との位相差が複数)の干渉縞が標本上に形成され、演算部220は、それぞれの干渉縞が形成された標本の画像を逐次、生成する。例えば、干渉縞の方向を3方向として、かつ各方向に対して3種類の位相差(つまり、第1光線束に対する第2光線束の位相差が3種類)の干渉縞を標本上に形成する場合、演算部220は9枚の画像を生成する。なお、干渉縞の方向や位相差の種類は3種類でなくてもよく、それぞれが3種類以上であればよい。 The imaging unit 210 according to the present embodiment includes an imaging element 211 and an imaging control unit 212. The image sensor 211 includes an image sensor such as a CCD sensor or a CMOS sensor. The image sensor 211 includes a light receiving surface on which a plurality of photodiodes are arranged, and a readout circuit that reads signals from the plurality of photodiodes. The light receiving surface of the image sensor 211 is disposed on a conjugate surface OS4 that is optically conjugate with the illumination area LA in which the specimen SP is disposed. The light receiving surface of the image sensor 211 may be displaced from the conjugate surface OS4 within the range of the focal depth in the direction of the optical axis AX2 of the imaging optical system 200. The imaging control unit 212 controls the readout circuit of the imaging element 211 to control imaging timing and the like, and A / D converts the signal from the readout circuit and transfers the signal to the arithmetic unit 220. The calculation unit 220 performs a calculation for generating an image of the specimen SP based on the signal transferred from the image sensor 211. Specifically, interference fringes of a plurality of phases (that is, a plurality of phase differences between the first and second light beams) controlled by the drive control unit 160 in each direction are sampled. The calculation unit 220 is formed on the top, and sequentially generates an image of the sample on which each interference fringe is formed. For example, the interference fringes have three directions, and three kinds of phase differences (that is, three kinds of phase differences of the second light flux with respect to the first light flux) are formed on the sample. In this case, the calculation unit 220 generates nine images. Note that the direction of the interference fringes and the type of the phase difference need not be three, and each may be three or more.

 次に、光線束生成部110について、より詳しく説明する。光線束生成部110は、回折格子111およびシャッター部材131を含む。 Next, the light flux generation unit 110 will be described in more detail. The light beam generation unit 110 includes a diffraction grating 111 and a shutter member 131.

 本実施形態における回折格子111は、石英基板に凹凸の溝を形成した位相型回折格子であり、光源装置100から入射した光を回折させる。本実施形態に係る回折格子111は、板状であり、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対してほぼ垂直に配置されている。回折格子111は、照明光学系150との相対位置が固定されており、回転不能に設けられている。回折格子111は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に交差する面に平行な方向に、凹凸が周期的に並ぶ周期構造を有する。なお、回折格子111は、形成された凹凸の溝について、周期構造の凹部には、屈折率が凸部と異なる材料が埋め込まれた位相型回折格子であってもよいし、石英基板にクロムの遮光膜を形成した振幅型回折格子でもよい。また、CGHなどの回折格子であってもよく、各種の回折格子を適用することができる。 The diffraction grating 111 in the present embodiment is a phase type diffraction grating in which concave and convex grooves are formed on a quartz substrate, and diffracts light incident from the light source device 100. The diffraction grating 111 according to the present embodiment has a plate shape and is disposed substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The diffraction grating 111 has a fixed relative position to the illumination optical system 150 and is provided so as not to rotate. The diffraction grating 111 has a periodic structure in which irregularities are periodically arranged in a direction parallel to a plane intersecting the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. Note that the diffraction grating 111 may be a phase-type diffraction grating in which a recess having a periodic structure is embedded with a material having a refractive index different from that of the protrusion. An amplitude type diffraction grating having a light shielding film may be used. Further, a diffraction grating such as CGH may be used, and various diffraction gratings can be applied.

 図2は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見た回折格子111の平面図である。図2に示すように、本実施形態に係る回折格子111は、いわゆる多方向回折格子であって、第1方向D1、第2方向D2、第3方向D3のそれぞれにおいて凹凸が周期的に並ぶ周期構造を有する。第1方向D1、第2方向D2、及び第3方向D3は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に直交する面上の、互いに異なる方向である。図2に示す回折格子111の周期構造は、いわゆる三角格子状であり、第1方向D1、第2方向D2、第3方向D3は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周りの周方向に約120°の間隔で分布している。回折格子111に入射した光は、第1方向D1、第2方向D2、第3方向D3のそれぞれの周期構造により回折する。 FIG. 2 is a plan view of the diffraction grating 111 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the diffraction grating 111 according to the present embodiment is a so-called multidirectional diffraction grating, and a period in which unevenness is periodically arranged in each of the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3. It has a structure. The first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3 are different directions on a plane orthogonal to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 shown in FIG. 2 is a so-called triangular lattice shape, and the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3 are approximately in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. It is distributed at intervals of 120 °. The light incident on the diffraction grating 111 is diffracted by the respective periodic structures in the first direction D1, the second direction D2, and the third direction D3.

 すなわち、光線束生成部110は、互いに異なる3以上の各方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を3以上の各方向に分布する複数の光線束に分割する回折格子111(多方向回折格子)を備えている。 That is, the light beam generation unit 110 has a periodic structure in three or more directions different from each other, and divides an incident light beam into a plurality of light beams distributed in three or more directions (multidirectional diffraction). Grid).

 第1方向D1の周期構造による回折により、+(プラス)1次回折光、0次回折光、及び-(マイナス)1次回折光を含む回折光が投影レンズ151で屈折してシャッター部材131に入射する。以下の説明において、回折格子111の各点への入射光に対して、回折格子111で回折する方向を、適宜、回折方向という。 Due to diffraction by the periodic structure in the first direction D1, diffracted light including + (plus) 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light, and − (minus) 1st order diffracted light is refracted by the projection lens 151 and enters the shutter member 131. In the following description, the direction in which the light incident on each point of the diffraction grating 111 is diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is appropriately referred to as a diffraction direction.

 以下の説明において、回折格子111における第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光、-1次回折光を、適宜、第1方向D1の+1次回折光、第1方向D1の-1次回折光という。 In the following description, the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 in the diffraction grating 111 are appropriately referred to as the + 1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1 and the −1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1. .

 第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光、-1次回折光を、適宜、第2方向D2の+1次回折光、第2方向D2の-1次回折光という。 The + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 are appropriately referred to as the + 1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2 and the −1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2.

 第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光、-1次回折光を、適宜、第3方向D3の+1次回折光、第3方向D3の-1次回折光という。 + 1st order diffracted light and −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are appropriately referred to as + 1st order diffracted light in the third direction D3 and −1st order diffracted light in the third direction D3.

 回折格子111の周期構造上の各点から出射した+1次回折光LM1は、投影レンズ151で屈折して、回折格子111からの回折角と投影レンズ151の焦点距離により定まる共役面OS1上の点A1に集光し、シャッター部材131に入射する。回折格子111の周期構造上の各点から射出した-1次回折光LM2は、投影レンズ151で屈折して、回折格子111からの回折角と投影レンズ151の焦点距離により定まる共役面OS1上の点A2に集光し、シャッター部材131に入射する。点A2の位置は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して点A1の位置と点対称である。投影レンズ151から共役面OS1の間において、各回折方向の+1次回折光の光路は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、同じ回折方向の-1次回折光の光路と点対称となる。 The + 1st order diffracted light LM1 emitted from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151, and is a point A1 on the conjugate plane OS1 determined by the diffraction angle from the diffraction grating 111 and the focal length of the projection lens 151. And is incident on the shutter member 131. The −1st order diffracted light LM2 emitted from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151, and is a point on the conjugate plane OS1 determined by the diffraction angle from the diffraction grating 111 and the focal length of the projection lens 151. The light is focused on A2 and enters the shutter member 131. The position of the point A2 is point-symmetric with the position of the point A1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. Between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light in each diffraction direction is point-symmetric with respect to the optical path of the −1st order diffracted light in the same diffraction direction with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.

 本実施形態におけるシャッター部材131は、投影レンズ151と共役面OS1との間の光路に配置されている。シャッター部材131は、板状であり、投影レンズ151からの回折光が入射する面が照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対してほぼ垂直である。シャッター部材131は、回転軸AX3の周りで回転可能である。本実施形態において、シャッター部材131の回転軸AX3は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と同軸である。シャッター部材131は、回折格子111からのそれぞれの回折方向におけるそれぞれの次数の回折光の光路に対して相対的に回転可能である。 The shutter member 131 in the present embodiment is disposed in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1. The shutter member 131 is plate-shaped, and the surface on which the diffracted light from the projection lens 151 is incident is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The shutter member 131 can rotate around the rotation axis AX3. In the present embodiment, the rotation axis AX3 of the shutter member 131 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The shutter member 131 is rotatable relative to the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111.

 シャッター部材131は、電動モーターなどの駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転軸AX3周りに回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160に制御されて、シャッター部材131を回転させる。駆動制御部160は、駆動部を制御することによって、シャッター部材131の回転角を制御できる。ここで、回転角とは、ある回転軸まわりに被回転体をある角度だけ回転させた場合の、その角度である。例えば、シャッター部材131の回転角が120°とは、回転軸AX3まわりにシャッター部材131を120°だけ回転させた場合をいう。駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131の回転角を制御することにより、回折格子111からのそれぞれの回折方向におけるそれぞれの次数の回折光の光路とシャッター部材131との相対的な回転角を制御できる。 The shutter member 131 rotates around the rotation axis AX3 by torque supplied from a driving unit such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 to rotate the shutter member 131. The drive control unit 160 can control the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 by controlling the drive unit. Here, the rotation angle is an angle when the rotated body is rotated by a certain angle around a certain rotation axis. For example, the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 being 120 ° refers to a case where the shutter member 131 is rotated by 120 ° around the rotation axis AX3. The drive control unit 160 can control the relative rotation angle between the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131 by controlling the rotation angle of the shutter member 131. .

 図3は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見たシャッター部材131の平面図である。図3に示すように、シャッター部材131は、光が通過可能な通過部ATと、光を遮る遮光部ASとを有する。 FIG. 3 is a plan view of the shutter member 131 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT through which light can pass and a light shielding portion AS that blocks light.

 遮光部ASは、投影レンズ151からの光を吸収と反射の一方または双方により遮る。遮光部ASは、例えば基材上に形成された遮光膜であり、通過部ATは、例えば遮光部ASを構成する基材に形成された開口の内側の領域である。通過部ATは、遮光部ASの間の空隙であってもよいし、遮光部ASの間に配置され光が通過する特性の部材を含んでいてもよい。 The light shielding part AS blocks the light from the projection lens 151 by one or both of absorption and reflection. The light shielding part AS is, for example, a light shielding film formed on a base material, and the passage part AT is, for example, a region inside an opening formed in the base material constituting the light shielding part AS. The passage portion AT may be a gap between the light shielding portions AS, or may include a member that is disposed between the light shielding portions AS and through which light passes.

 本実施形態において、シャッター部材131は、円板状である。遮光部ASの少なくとも一部は、回転軸AX3の周りの周方向において通過部ATと異なる位置に配置される。本実施形態において、通過部ATは開口であり、第1通過部ATaおよび第2通過部ATbを含む。第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbは、それぞれ、回転軸AX3の方向から見た形状が三角形状の開口である。第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbは、回転軸AX3からの放射方向において回転軸AX3から離れるにつれて、放射方向に直交する方向の寸法が大きくなる。一例として、図3に示すように、シャッター部材131は、回転軸AX3を中心とする中心角θa、および中心角θbの大きさがそれぞれ20°である第1通過部ATaと、第2通過部ATbとを備えている。また、シャッター部材131のうち、回転軸AX3およびその周囲(例えば、図3に示す領域AS0)は、開口しておらず、遮光部ASである。 In the present embodiment, the shutter member 131 has a disk shape. At least a part of the light shielding part AS is arranged at a position different from the passing part AT in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX3. In the present embodiment, the passage portion AT is an opening and includes a first passage portion ATa and a second passage portion ATb. Each of the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb is an opening having a triangular shape when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX3. As the first passing portion ATa and the second passing portion ATb are separated from the rotation axis AX3 in the radial direction from the rotation axis AX3, the dimensions in the direction orthogonal to the radial direction increase. As an example, as shown in FIG. 3, the shutter member 131 includes a first passage portion ATa having a central angle θa centered on the rotation axis AX3 and a center angle θb of 20 °, and a second passage portion. ATb. Further, in the shutter member 131, the rotation axis AX3 and the periphery thereof (for example, the region AS0 shown in FIG. 3) are not opened but are light shielding portions AS.

 第1通過部ATaは、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、第2通過部ATbと点対称な位置に配置される。上述の通り、各回折方向の+1次回折光の光路は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、同じ回折方向の-1次回折光の光路と点対称になるため、シャッター部材131の回転により、第1通過部ATaが第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光の光路に配置された状態(以下、この状態を便宜上、第1状態とする)では、第2通過部ATbは、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した1次回折光の光路に配置される。つまり、第1状態では、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と-1次回折光とがそれぞれ、第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbとを介してシャッター部材131を通過する。一方、第1状態において、遮光部ASは、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路、及び第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路に配置される。つまり、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路、及び第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路はシャッター部材131で遮光される。 The first passage portion ATa is disposed at a point symmetrical with the second passage portion ATb with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. As described above, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light in each diffraction direction is point-symmetric with respect to the optical path of the −1st order diffracted light in the same diffraction direction with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. In a state where the first passage portion ATa is arranged in the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 (hereinafter, this state is referred to as the first state for convenience), the second passage portion ATb is Arranged in the optical path of the first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the direction D1. That is, in the first state, the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 pass through the shutter member 131 via the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb, respectively. . On the other hand, in the first state, the light-shielding portion AS is disposed in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3. . That is, the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are shielded by the shutter member 131.

 第1通過部ATaは、シャッター部材131の回転により、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光の光路に配置可能である。第1通過部ATaが第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光の光路に配置された状態(以下、この状態を便宜上、第2状態とする)では、第2通過部ATbは、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光の光路に配置される。第2状態において、遮光部ASは、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路、及び第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路に配置される。 The first passage portion ATa can be arranged in the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 by the rotation of the shutter member 131. In a state where the first passage portion ATa is disposed in the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a second state for convenience), the second passage portion ATb is It is arranged in the optical path of −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in two directions D2. In the second state, the light-shielding part AS is arranged in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3.

 第1通過部ATaは、シャッター部材131の回転により、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光の光路に配置可能である。第1通過部ATaが第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光の光路に配置された状態(以下、この状態を便宜上、第3状態とする)では、第2通過部ATbは、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光の光路に配置される。第3状態において、遮光部ASは、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路、及び第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光の光路に配置される。 The first passage portion ATa can be arranged on the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 by the rotation of the shutter member 131. In a state where the first passage portion ATa is disposed in the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a third state for convenience), the second passage portion ATb It is arranged in the optical path of −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the three directions D3. In the third state, the light-shielding part AS is arranged in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and in the optical path of ± first-order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2.

 このように、回折格子111で回折した複数の回折光のうち、通過部ATを通過する回折光および遮光部ASに遮られる回折光は、シャッター部材131の回転角に応じて選択される。換言すると、シャッター部材131は、回折格子111が分割した複数の光線束のうち、一つの回折方向に沿って分布する±1次回折光を、照明領域LAに向かう第1光線束及び第2光線束として選択する。 As described above, among the plurality of diffracted lights diffracted by the diffraction grating 111, the diffracted light passing through the passing part AT and the diffracted light blocked by the light shielding part AS are selected according to the rotation angle of the shutter member 131. In other words, the shutter member 131 converts ± first-order diffracted light distributed along one diffraction direction out of the plurality of light bundles divided by the diffraction grating 111 into the first light flux and the second light flux directed toward the illumination area LA. Choose as.

 すなわち、光線束生成部110は、回折格子111(多方向回折格子)が分割した3以上の各方向に沿って分布する複数の光線束のうちから、1方向に沿って分布する2つの光線束を第1光線束及び第2光線束として選択する光線束選択部を備えている。なお、シャッター部材131とは、光線束選択部の一例である。 That is, the light beam generation unit 110 includes two light beams distributed along one direction among a plurality of light beams distributed along each of three or more directions divided by the diffraction grating 111 (multidirectional diffraction grating). Is included as a first light flux and a second light flux. The shutter member 131 is an example of a light beam selection unit.

 図4は、回折格子111で回折した各回折光が共役面OS1で集光して形成されたスポット光の共役面OS1上における位置を示す図である。図4に示すように、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A1は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A2と点対称である。第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A3は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A4と点対称である。第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A5は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した1次回折光のスポットが配置される領域A6と点対称である。 FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the position on the conjugate plane OS1 of the spot light formed by converging each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 on the conjugate plane OS1. As shown in FIG. 4, the region A1 where the spot of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. It is point-symmetric with the region A2 where the spot of the first-order diffracted light is arranged. In the region A3 where the spot of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is arranged, the spot of the first order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is arranged with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. And point symmetry with respect to the region A4. In the region A5 where the spot of the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 is arranged, the spot of the first order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 is arranged with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. And point symmetry with respect to the region A6.

 領域A1から領域A6は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1を囲んで、離散的に並んでいる。一例として、この領域A1から領域A6は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周りの周方向に60°ずつ離れて並んでいる。なお、以下の説明において、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周りの周方向の角度を便宜上、回転角とも記載する。すなわち、領域A1が配置される照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周りの周方向の位置を基準(つまり、回転角0°)とした場合、領域A2は回転角180°に、領域A3は回転角60°に、領域A4は回転角240°に、領域A5は回転角120°に、領域A6は回転角300°に、それぞれ配置される。 The region A1 to the region A6 surround the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and are arranged in a discrete manner. As an example, the area A1 to the area A6 are arranged 60 degrees apart in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. In the following description, the angle in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 is also referred to as a rotation angle for convenience. That is, when the position in the circumferential direction around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 in which the region A1 is disposed is used as a reference (that is, the rotation angle is 0 °), the region A2 is rotated at a rotation angle of 180 ° and the region A3 is rotated. The region A4 is disposed at a rotation angle of 240 °, the region A5 is disposed at a rotation angle of 120 °, and the region A6 is disposed at a rotation angle of 300 °.

 次に、位相付与部120について、より詳しく説明する。位相付与部120は、光源101からの光の少なくとも一部が透過する透過部材141を含む。透過部材141は、共役面OS1の位置に配置されている。透過部材141は、板状の部材であり、光源101からの光が入射する面が照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対してほぼ垂直である。透過部材141は、回転軸AX4の周りで回転可能である。本実施形態において、透過部材141の回転軸AX4は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と同軸である。透過部材141は、回折格子111からのそれぞれの回折方向におけるそれぞれの次数の回折光の光路に対して相対的に回転可能である。 Next, the phase imparting unit 120 will be described in more detail. The phase providing unit 120 includes a transmission member 141 that transmits at least part of the light from the light source 101. The transmitting member 141 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1. The transmission member 141 is a plate-like member, and the surface on which light from the light source 101 enters is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The transmission member 141 is rotatable around the rotation axis AX4. In the present embodiment, the rotation axis AX4 of the transmission member 141 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The transmissive member 141 can rotate relative to the optical path of each order of diffracted light in each diffraction direction from the diffraction grating 111.

 透過部材141は、電動モーターなどの不図示の駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160に制御されて、透過部材141を回転させる。駆動制御部160は、駆動部を制御することによって、透過部材141の回転角を制御できる。駆動制御部160は、透過部材141の回転角を制御することにより、回折格子111からのそれぞれの回折方向におけるそれぞれの次数の回折光の光路と透過部材141との相対的な回転角を制御できる。 The transmission member 141 is rotated by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 to rotate the transmission member 141. The drive control unit 160 can control the rotation angle of the transmission member 141 by controlling the drive unit. The drive control unit 160 can control the relative rotation angle between the optical path of each order of diffracted light from the diffraction grating 111 and the transmission member 141 by controlling the rotation angle of the transmission member 141. .

 図5(a)は透過部材141の斜視図、図5(b)は照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見た透過部材141の平面図、図5(c)は透過部材141を端面の方向から見た側面図である。 5A is a perspective view of the transmissive member 141, FIG. 5B is a plan view of the transmissive member 141 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, and FIG. 5C is an end view of the transmissive member 141. It is the side view seen from the direction.

 図5(a)に示すように、本実施形態に係る透過部材141は、円板状である。透過部材141は、第1領域121および第2領域122を含む。第2領域122における透過部材141と、第1領域121における透過部材141は、それぞれ、回折格子111で回折した回折光が透過可能な材質である。この透過部材141は、第1領域121を通過する回折光の位相と、第2領域122を透過する回折光の位相とを、互いに異なる位相にして、回折格子111で回折した回折光を透過させる。つまり、第1領域121を透過する回折光と第2領域122を透過する回折光とに位相差をつける。ここで、便宜的に、透過部材は、第1領域121を透過した回折光の位相を基準として第2領域122を透過する回折光に位相差をつけることとして、第1領域121を基準位相領域とする。このとき、第2領域122は、透過する回折光の位相を、基準位相とは異なる位相に変換して通過させる。以下の説明において、この第2領域122を位相変調領域122とも記載する。第1領域121を透過する回折光と第2領域122を透過する回折光とに付与する位相差は、例えば0(つまり同相)及び2π/3である。この場合、第1領域121を透過する回折光に対して第2領域122を透過する回折光の位相を2π/3だけ進相させるかもしくは遅相させる。つまり、+1次回折光に対する-1次回折光の位相差を0、2π/3、及び-2π/3の3種類とする。なお、位相差の変化のさせ方については後述する。なお、付与する位相差は2π/3に限られることはなく他の値であってもよい。 As shown in FIG. 5A, the transmissive member 141 according to the present embodiment has a disk shape. The transmissive member 141 includes a first region 121 and a second region 122. The transmission member 141 in the second region 122 and the transmission member 141 in the first region 121 are materials that can transmit the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111. The transmitting member 141 transmits the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 with the phase of the diffracted light passing through the first region 121 and the phase of the diffracted light passing through the second region 122 being different from each other. . That is, a phase difference is set between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122. Here, for convenience, the transmission member sets the first region 121 as a reference phase region by giving a phase difference to the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 with reference to the phase of the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121. And At this time, the second region 122 converts the phase of the transmitted diffracted light into a phase different from the reference phase and passes it. In the following description, the second region 122 is also referred to as a phase modulation region 122. The phase difference imparted to the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 is, for example, 0 (that is, the same phase) and 2π / 3. In this case, the phase of the diffracted light transmitted through the second region 122 is advanced or delayed by 2π / 3 with respect to the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121. That is, the phase difference of the −1st order diffracted light with respect to the + 1st order diffracted light is set to three types of 0, 2π / 3, and −2π / 3. Note that how to change the phase difference will be described later. Note that the phase difference to be applied is not limited to 2π / 3 but may be other values.

 本実施形態において、透過部材141は、石英基板上にフッ化マグネシウム膜を形成した位相板である。この位相板において、第1領域121は石英基板であり、第2領域122は石英基板と石英基板上に形成されたフッ化マグネシウム膜となる。第2領域122における透過部材141の厚み方向の光学的距離は、第1領域121における透過部材141の厚み方向の光学的距離よりも長くなり、異なる。なお、透過部材141は、石英基板上にフッ化マグネシウム膜を形成した位相板だけでなく、石英基板上に二酸化シリコン膜を形成した位相板であってもよいし、エッチングや機械的に研削/研磨して石英基板上に厚みの異なる領域を形成したものであってもよい。 In this embodiment, the transmission member 141 is a phase plate in which a magnesium fluoride film is formed on a quartz substrate. In this phase plate, the first region 121 is a quartz substrate, and the second region 122 is a quartz substrate and a magnesium fluoride film formed on the quartz substrate. The optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 in the second region 122 is longer than the optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 in the first region 121 and is different. The transmitting member 141 is not limited to a phase plate in which a magnesium fluoride film is formed on a quartz substrate, but may be a phase plate in which a silicon dioxide film is formed on a quartz substrate. It may be polished to form regions of different thickness on a quartz substrate.

 図5(b)に示すように、透過部材141は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見た形状が円形であり、その中心に回転軸AX4が設定されている。回転軸AX4の周りの周方向において、第2領域122と、第1領域121とは透過部材141の異なる領域である。 As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the transmissive member 141 has a circular shape when viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, and a rotation axis AX4 is set at the center thereof. In the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4, the second region 122 and the first region 121 are different regions of the transmission member 141.

 照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、第2領域122と点対称な領域の少なくとも一部は第1領域121になっている。第2領域122は、回転軸AX4の周りの周方向において180°未満の範囲に分布している。第1領域121は、回転軸AX4の周りの周方向において180°を超える範囲に分布している。一例として、第2領域122は、回転軸AX4の周りの周方向において40°の範囲に分布している。 Referring to the optical axis AX <b> 1 of the illumination optical system 150, at least a part of the region that is point-symmetric with the second region 122 is the first region 121. The second region 122 is distributed in a range of less than 180 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4. The first region 121 is distributed in a range exceeding 180 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4. As an example, the second region 122 is distributed in a range of 40 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4.

 図5(c)に示すように、本実施形態に係る透過部材141は、第2領域122における厚みが第1領域121における厚みとほぼ同じである。透過部材141は、第2領域122の屈折率が第1領域121の屈折率と異なることにより、第2領域122における光学的距離が第1領域121における光学的距離と異なっている。本実施形態において、第2領域122の屈折率は、第1領域121の屈折率よりも大きく、第2領域122における光学的距離が第1領域121における光学的距離よりも長い。その結果、透過部材141は、第2領域122を透過する光線束と第1領域121を透過する光線束との位相差を、第2領域122を通る光線束の位相が遅れるように調整する。 As shown in FIG. 5C, in the transmissive member 141 according to this embodiment, the thickness in the second region 122 is substantially the same as the thickness in the first region 121. In the transmissive member 141, the optical distance in the second region 122 is different from the optical distance in the first region 121 because the refractive index of the second region 122 is different from the refractive index of the first region 121. In the present embodiment, the refractive index of the second region 122 is larger than the refractive index of the first region 121, and the optical distance in the second region 122 is longer than the optical distance in the first region 121. As a result, the transmissive member 141 adjusts the phase difference between the light beam transmitted through the second region 122 and the light beam transmitted through the first region 121 so that the phase of the light beam passing through the second region 122 is delayed.

 図6は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141のそれぞれの回転角が所定の回転角であるときのシャッター部材131から照明領域LAに至る光束を示す図である。図6において、+1次回折光の一部の光線Caは、シャッター部材131の第1通過部ATaを通過して、透過部材141の第2領域122に入射する。この光線Caは、透過部材141の第2領域122を透過した後に、ダイクロイックミラー156で反射して対物レンズ154に入射する。この光線Caは、対物レンズ154で屈折し、照明領域LAに配置された標本SPに入射する。-1次回折光の一部の光線Cbは、シャッター部材131の第2通過部ATbを通過して、透過部材141の第1領域121に入射する。この光線Cbは、透過部材141の第1領域121を透過した後に、ダイクロイックミラー156で反射して対物レンズ154に入射する。この光線Cbは、対物レンズ154で屈折し、照明領域LAに配置された標本SP上で+1次回折光の光線Caに交わるように、標本SPに入射する。 FIG. 6 is a view showing light fluxes from the shutter member 131 to the illumination area LA when the rotation angles of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are predetermined rotation angles. In FIG. 6, a part of light rays Ca of the + 1st order diffracted light passes through the first passage portion ATa of the shutter member 131 and enters the second region 122 of the transmission member 141. The light beam Ca passes through the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141, is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, and enters the objective lens 154. The light beam Ca is refracted by the objective lens 154 and is incident on the specimen SP disposed in the illumination area LA. The partial light ray Cb of the −1st order diffracted light passes through the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131 and enters the first region 121 of the transmission member 141. The light ray Cb passes through the first region 121 of the transmissive member 141, is reflected by the dichroic mirror 156, and enters the objective lens 154. The light beam Cb is refracted by the objective lens 154 and enters the sample SP so as to intersect the light beam Ca of the + 1st order diffracted light on the sample SP arranged in the illumination area LA.

 このようにして、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した+1次回折光と-1次回折光が標本SP上で干渉し(いわゆる、二光束干渉)、標本SP上に干渉縞が形成される。+1次回折光と-1次回折光との干渉縞の共役面OS3(照明領域LA)における強度分布は、照明領域LAにおける+1次回折光と-1次回折光との位相差に応じた強度になる。換言すると、照明領域LAにおける+1次回折光と-1次回折光の位相差を制御することにより、干渉縞の共役面OS3(照明領域LA)における強度分布を制御できる。 Thus, the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 interfere on the sample SP (so-called two-beam interference), and interference fringes are formed on the sample SP. The intensity distribution on the conjugate plane OS3 (illumination area LA) of the interference fringes between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light has an intensity corresponding to the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light in the illumination area LA. In other words, the intensity distribution in the conjugate plane OS3 (illumination area LA) of the interference fringes can be controlled by controlling the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light in the illumination area LA.

 ところで、本実施形態において、照明装置10は、+1次回折光と-1次回折光との二光束干渉により干渉縞を形成する。そこで、照明装置10は、回折格子111で回折せずに透過した0次回折光を、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間のいずれかの位置で遮る。 By the way, in this embodiment, the illuminating device 10 forms interference fringes by two-beam interference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light. Therefore, the illumination device 10 blocks the 0th-order diffracted light transmitted without being diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 at any position between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA.

 図1に示すように、回折格子111の周期構造上の各点からの0次回折光A3は、投影レンズ151で屈折して、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と共役面OS1との交点A0に集光する。回折格子111で回折した±1次回折光が集光したスポット光と0次回折光が集光したスポット光との間隔は、投影レンズ151とリレーレンズ152との間の光路において、共役面OS1の位置で極大になる。そこで、本実施形態に係る照明装置10は、共役面OS1の位置またはその近傍に配置される遮光部材によって0次回折光を遮る。具体的には、本実施形態に係る照明装置10は、シャッター部材131によって0次回折光を遮る。上述したように、シャッター部材131は、回転軸AX3およびその周囲の領域AS0が遮光部ASである。この領域AS0は、シャッター部材131の回転角にかかわらず、交点A0の近傍に配置される。また、0次回折光は、回折格子111の回転角にかかわらず、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と共役面OS1との交点A0に集光する。
つまり、シャッター部材131の回転角、および回折格子111の回転角にかかわらず、0次回折光の光路は、シャッター部材131で遮光される。
As shown in FIG. 1, the 0th-order diffracted light A3 from each point on the periodic structure of the diffraction grating 111 is refracted by the projection lens 151 and reaches the intersection A0 between the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the conjugate plane OS1. Condensate. The distance between the spot light collected by the ± 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 and the spot light collected by the 0th order diffracted light is the position of the conjugate plane OS1 in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152. It becomes maximum at. Therefore, the illumination device 10 according to the present embodiment blocks the 0th-order diffracted light by the light blocking member disposed at or near the conjugate plane OS1. Specifically, the illumination device 10 according to the present embodiment blocks the 0th-order diffracted light by the shutter member 131. As described above, in the shutter member 131, the rotation axis AX3 and the surrounding area AS0 are the light shielding portion AS. This area AS0 is arranged in the vicinity of the intersection A0 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131. Further, the 0th-order diffracted light is collected at the intersection A0 between the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 and the conjugate plane OS1 regardless of the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111.
That is, regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 and the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111, the optical path of the 0th-order diffracted light is shielded by the shutter member 131.

 このような0次回折光を遮る遮光部材は、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間の光路において、0次回折光の光路が±1次回折光の光路と重複しない、いずれかの位置に配置されていてもよい。このような遮光部材の数は1つでもよいし、複数でもよい。また、このような遮光部材は、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間に配置される1又は2以上の部材に設けられていてもよく、例えばシャッター部材131、透過部材141の一方または双方に設けられていてもよい。 Such a light blocking member that blocks the 0th-order diffracted light is arranged at any position in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA so that the optical path of the 0th-order diffracted light does not overlap with the optical path of ± 1st-order diffracted light. May be. The number of such light shielding members may be one or plural. Further, such a light shielding member may be provided on one or more members disposed between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA. For example, one or both of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 may be provided. It may be provided.

 [駆動制御部の動作]
 次に、駆動制御部160の動作について説明する。駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120をそれぞれ駆動して、干渉縞の方向と位相とを制御する。この駆動制御部160が制御する干渉縞の方向と位相の具体例について、図7~図10を参照して説明する。本実施形態において、±1次回折光による干渉縞の方向を3方向に変化させ、かつ各方向の干渉縞について、±1次回折光の位相差を3種類(つまり、+1次回折光に対する-1次回折光の位相差を3種類)に変化させて9回の撮像を実行する。
[Operation of drive control unit]
Next, the operation of the drive control unit 160 will be described. The drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase applying unit 120, respectively, to control the direction and phase of the interference fringes. Specific examples of the direction and phase of the interference fringes controlled by the drive control unit 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the direction of the interference fringes by ± 1st order diffracted light is changed in three directions, and the three kinds of phase differences of ± 1st order diffracted light (that is, −1st order diffracted light with respect to + 1st order diffracted light) The phase difference is changed to three types) and nine times of imaging are executed.

 図7は、本実施形態の光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120の第1の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。この光線束生成部110は、上述したように、回折格子111と、シャッター部材131とを備えている。また、位相付与部120は、上述したように、第1領域121と、第2領域122とを備える透過部材141を備えている。駆動制御部160は、位相付与部120の透過部材141と、光線束生成部110のシャッター部材131とを連動させて駆動することにより、干渉縞の方向と位相とを制御する。 FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a first positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment. As described above, the light beam generation unit 110 includes the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131. Moreover, the phase provision part 120 is provided with the permeation | transmission member 141 provided with the 1st area | region 121 and the 2nd area | region 122 as mentioned above. The drive control unit 160 controls the direction and phase of the interference fringes by driving the transmission member 141 of the phase applying unit 120 and the shutter member 131 of the light beam generation unit 110 in conjunction with each other.

 ここでは、はじめに干渉縞の方向と位相とのうち、干渉縞の位相を駆動制御部160が制御する仕組みの具体例について説明する。次に、干渉縞の方向と位相とのうち、干渉縞の方向を駆動制御部160が制御する仕組みの具体例について説明する。次に、駆動制御部160が、干渉縞の方向と位相とを同期させて制御する仕組みの具体例について説明する。 Here, a specific example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160 controls the phase of the interference fringe out of the direction and phase of the interference fringe will be described first. Next, a specific example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160 controls the interference fringe direction out of the interference fringe direction and phase will be described. Next, a specific example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160 controls the interference fringe direction and phase in synchronization will be described.

[干渉縞の位相の制御]
 まず、干渉縞の位相を駆動制御部160が制御する仕組みの具体例について図7を参照して説明する。上述したように、回折格子111からは、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光と、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光と、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光とが射出される。
[Control of interference fringe phase]
First, a specific example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160 controls the phase of the interference fringes will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, from the diffraction grating 111, the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1, the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1, and the periodic structure in the second direction D2. Diffracted + 1st order diffracted light, −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2, + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3, and −1 diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 Next-order diffracted light is emitted.

 以下の説明において、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光とを総称して回折光L1と記載する。また、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光とを総称して回折光L2と記載し、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光と、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光とを総称して回折光L3と記載する。すなわち、回折格子111からは、回折光L1、回折光L2、回折光L3の3組の回折光が射出される。 In the following description, + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 and −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L1. The + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L2, and the periodic structure in the third direction D3. The + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the above and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the third direction D3 are collectively referred to as diffracted light L3. That is, the diffraction grating 111 emits three sets of diffracted light, that is, diffracted light L1, diffracted light L2, and diffracted light L3.

 また、以下の説明において、回折光L1のうち、+1次の回折光と、-1次の回折光とを区別する場合には、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光を回折光L1-1と記載し、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光を回折光L1-2と記載する。同様に、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光を回折光L2-1、第2方向D2の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光を回折光L2-2と記載し、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光を回折光L3-1、第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した-1次回折光を回折光L3-2と記載する。
 また、以下の説明において、シャッター部材131上の図7に示す位置を基準点Pとし、この基準点Pの回転軸AX3(または、回転軸AX3と同軸の光軸AX1)まわりの回転角を、シャッター部材131の回転角として説明する。また、以下の説明において、透過部材141上の図7に示す位置を基準点Qとし、この基準点Qの回転軸AX4(または、回転軸AX4と同軸の光軸AX1)まわりの回転角を、透過部材141の回転角として説明する。
In the following description, in the case of distinguishing the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light from the diffracted light L1, the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is diffracted light. A −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 is denoted as L1-1, and is denoted as diffracted light L1-2. Similarly, the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is described as diffracted light L2-1, the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the second direction D2 is described as diffracted light L2-2, and the third direction The + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure of D3 is referred to as diffracted light L3-1, and the −1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure of the third direction D3 is referred to as diffracted light L3-2.
In the following description, the position shown in FIG. 7 on the shutter member 131 is set as a reference point P, and the rotation angle of the reference point P around the rotation axis AX3 (or the optical axis AX1 coaxial with the rotation axis AX3) is The rotation angle of the shutter member 131 will be described. In the following description, the position shown in FIG. 7 on the transmissive member 141 is set as a reference point Q, and the rotation angle of the reference point Q around the rotation axis AX4 (or the optical axis AX1 coaxial with the rotation axis AX4) is The rotation angle of the transmissive member 141 will be described.

 ここで、回折光L1-1とは、第1光線束の一例であり、回折光L1-2とは、第2光線束の一例である。すなわち、光線束生成部110としての回折格子111は、光源101から射出された光から、第1光線束と第2光線束とを生成する。 Here, the diffracted light L1-1 is an example of the first light beam, and the diffracted light L1-2 is an example of the second light beam. That is, the diffraction grating 111 as the light beam generation unit 110 generates a first light beam and a second light beam from the light emitted from the light source 101.

 駆動制御部160は、図7(a)に示す位置(回転角0°および回転角180°の位置)にシャッター部材131の通過部ATが配置されるように、シャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、上述の図4のように回転角の基準(つまり、回転角0°)を設定すると、回折格子111から射出された6つの回折光のうち、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1が第1通過部ATaを通過し、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2が第2通過部ATbを通過する。また、回折格子111から射出された6つの回折光のうち、残り4つの回折光、すなわち回転角60°の位置に入射する回折光L2-1、回転角240°の位置に入射する回折光L2-2、回転角120°の位置に入射する回折光L3-1、および回転角300°の位置に入射する回折光L3-2は、シャッター部材131の遮光部によってそれぞれ遮光される。また、0次回折光は、上述したように、シャッター部材131の回転角、および回折格子111の回転角にかかわらず、シャッター部材131で遮光される。 The drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7A (positions where the rotation angle is 0 ° and the rotation angle is 180 °). Accordingly, when the reference of the rotation angle (that is, the rotation angle of 0 °) is set as shown in FIG. 4 described above, the diffraction incident on the position of the rotation angle of 0 ° among the six diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 111. The light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° passes through the second passage portion ATb. Of the six diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 111, the remaining four diffracted lights, that is, the diffracted light L2-1 incident on the rotation angle of 60 ° and the diffracted light L2 incident on the rotation angle of 240 °. -2, the diffracted light L3-1 incident on the rotation angle 120 ° and the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° are respectively shielded by the light shielding portion of the shutter member 131. Further, the 0th-order diffracted light is shielded by the shutter member 131 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 and the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 111 as described above.

 また、駆動制御部160は、図7(a)に示す位置(回転角0°の位置)に透過部材141の第2領域122が配置されるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した2つの回折光のうち、一方の回折光L1-1が第2領域122を通過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-1’になる。また、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した2つの回折光のうち、他方の回折光L1-2が第1領域121を通過する。このようにして位相付与部120は、同位相の回折光L1-1と、回折光L1-2とに位相差を付与する。 Further, the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7A (position of the rotation angle 0 °). As a result, of the two diffracted lights that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131, one of the diffracted lights L1-1 passes through the second region 122, the phase of which is modulated, and the diffracted light L1- 1 '. Of the two diffracted lights that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131, the other diffracted light L1-2 passes through the first region 121. In this way, the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase.

 ここで、上述したように、回折光L1-1とは、第1光線束の一例であり、回折光L1-2とは、第2光線束の一例である。すなわち、位相付与部120は、第1光線束と第2光線束とに位相差を付与する。 Here, as described above, the diffracted light L1-1 is an example of the first light beam, and the diffracted light L1-2 is an example of the second light beam. That is, the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux.

 ここで、第1通過部ATaの弧の両端を通る2つの半径が作る角を第1通過部ATaの中心角θaとし、第2通過部ATbの弧の両端を通る2つの半径が作る角を第2通過部ATbの中心角θbとする。このシャッター部材131の第1通過部ATaおよび第2通過部ATbは、図3を参照して説明したように、それぞれ、中心角(中心角θa、および中心角θb)の大きさが20°の開口である。ここで、駆動制御部160は、このシャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを停止させることなく連続的に回転させる。このため、シャッター部材131が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Pが回転角0°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1は、第1通過部ATaを通過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Pが回転角0°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2は、第2通過部ATbを通過し続ける。
 また、透過部材141の第2領域122は、回転軸AX4の周りの周方向において、基準点Qの位置を0°として、-20°から20°の範囲に分布している。このため、透過部材141が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Qが回転角-20°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1は、第2領域122を透過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Qが回転角-20°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2は、第1領域121を透過し続ける。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131の基準点Pを、回転角0°から回転角20°に達するまで回転駆動する間に、透過部材141の基準点Qを回転角-20°から回転角20°に達するまで回転駆動する。これにより、基準点Pが回転角0°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回折光L1-1は、第1通過部ATaと第2領域122とを透過し続け、回折光L1-2は、第2通過部ATbと第1領域121とを透過し続ける。
Here, an angle formed by two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the first passage portion ATa is defined as a central angle θa of the first passage portion ATa, and an angle formed by the two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the second passage portion ATb. The central angle θb of the second passage portion ATb is used. As described with reference to FIG. 3, the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131 each have a central angle (center angle θa and center angle θb) of 20 °. It is an opening. Here, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 continuously without stopping. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated, it enters the position of the rotation angle 0 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 0 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 20 °. The diffracted light L1-1 that continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa. Similarly, the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle 180 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 0 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 20 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb.
Further, the second region 122 of the transmission member 141 is distributed in a range from −20 ° to 20 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4 with the position of the reference point Q being 0 °. For this reason, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 0 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 20 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of −20 °. The incident diffracted light L1-1 continues to pass through the second region 122. Similarly, the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle −20 ° to the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 20 ° It continues to pass through one area 121.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141. Specifically, the drive controller 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 until the rotation angle reaches 20 ° from the rotation angle 0 °. Rotation is driven until the rotation angle reaches 20 °. Thus, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 0 ° and until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 20 °. The diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.

 次に、図7(b)を参照して、駆動制御部160が照明領域LAに照明される干渉縞の方向を図7(a)と変えずに、干渉縞の位相を変化させる場合について説明する。駆動制御部160は、図7(b)に示す位置(回転角120°の位置)に透過部材141の第2領域122が配置されるように、上述の図7(a)の状態から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。一方で、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131を通過する光線束が、図7(a)の状態から変わらず回折光L1-1と回折光L1-2になるようにシャッター部材131を、図7(a)の状態から連続的に回転駆動する。これにより、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した2つの回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を通過する。したがって、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2の位相は、透過部材141の通過後においても同位相になる。これは、図7(a)に示した場合、すなわち透過部材141の通過後において、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2に位相差がある場合と、位相差の有無の点で相違する。
 ここで、シャッター部材131が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Pが回転角180°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角200°に達するまでの間、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1は、第2通過部ATbを通過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Pが回転角180°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角200°に達するまでの間、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2は、第1通過部ATaを通過し続ける。
 また、透過部材141が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Qが回転角100°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1および回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2は、いずれも第1領域121を透過し続ける。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを同時に、連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131の基準点Pを、回転角180°から回転角200°に達するまで回転駆動する間に、透過部材141の基準点Qを回転角100°から回転角140°に達するまで回転駆動する。これにより、基準点Pが回転角180°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角200°に達するまでの間、回折光L1-1は、第2通過部ATbと第1領域121とを通過し続け、回折光L1-2は、第1通過部ATaと第1領域121とを通過し続ける。
Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a description will be given of a case where the drive control unit 160 changes the phase of the interference fringes without changing the direction of the interference fringes illuminated in the illumination area LA from that in FIG. To do. The drive control unit 160 starts from the state of FIG. 7A described above so that the second region 122 of the transmission member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 7B (position where the rotation angle is 120 °). 141 is continuously rotated. On the other hand, the drive control unit 160 displays the shutter member 131 so that the light flux passing through the shutter member 131 remains unchanged from the state of FIG. 7A to the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2. 7 is continuously rotated from the state of (a). As a result, the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131 both pass through the first region 121. Accordingly, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after passing through the transmission member 141. This is different from the case shown in FIG. 7 (a), that is, the case where there is a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 after passing through the transmitting member 141, and the presence or absence of the phase difference. To do.
Here, when the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated, it enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 200 °. The diffracted light L1-1 that continues continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb. Similarly, the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle 180 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 200 ° is the first diffracted light L1-2. Continue to pass through the passage part ATa.
Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 140 °. Both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° continue to pass through the first region 121.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 simultaneously. Specifically, the drive control unit 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 from the rotation angle of 180 ° to the rotation angle of 200 °. Until the rotation angle reaches 140 °. Thus, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 180 ° until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 200 °. The diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa and the first region 121.

 次に、図7(c)を参照して、駆動制御部160が透過部材141を光線束の進行方向に対して左回りに、図7(b)に示す場合に対してさらに回転角60°だけ回転駆動した場合について説明する。駆動制御部160は、図7(c)に示す位置(回転角180°の位置)に透過部材141の第2領域122が配置されるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した2つの回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2のうち、一方の回折光L1-2が第2領域122を通過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-2’になる。また、シャッター部材131の通過部ATを通過した2つの回折光のうち、他方の回折光L1-1が第1領域121を通過する。このようにして位相付与部120は、互いに同位相の回折光L1-1と、回折光L1-2とに位相差を付与する。これは、図7(a)に示した場合、すなわち透過部材141を通過した回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2とは、2つの回折光の位相差について、進相と遅相との関係が逆になる点で相違する。
 ここで、シャッター部材131と、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1、およびは、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2との関係は、図7(a)を参照して説明した場合と同様であるので、説明を省略する。
 また、透過部材141が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Qが回転角160°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角200°に達するまでの間、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1は、第1領域121を透過し続け、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2は、第2領域122を透過し続ける。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを同時に、連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131の基準点Pを、回転角0°から回転角20°に達するまで回転駆動する間に、透過部材141の基準点Qを回転角160°から回転角200°に達するまで回転駆動する。これにより、基準点Pが回転角0°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角20°に達するまでの間、回折光L1-1は、第1通過部ATaと第1領域121とを通過し続け、回折光L1-2は、第2通過部ATbと第2領域122とを通過し続ける。
Next, referring to FIG. 7C, the drive control unit 160 turns the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle, and further rotates by 60 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG. The case where only rotational driving is performed will be described. The drive controller 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position shown in FIG. As a result, of the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131, one diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated. The phase-modulated diffracted light L1-2 ′ is obtained. Of the two diffracted lights that have passed through the passage portion AT of the shutter member 131, the other diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first region 121. In this way, the phase applying unit 120 provides a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase. This is because, in the case shown in FIG. 7A, that is, the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 that have passed through the transmitting member 141 have a phase difference between the two diffracted lights. It is different in that the relationship is reversed.
Here, the relationship between the shutter member 131, the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 °, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° is shown in FIG. Since it is the same as that described with reference to FIG.
Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 0 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 160 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 200 °. The diffracted light L1-1 continues to pass through the first region 121, and the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° continues to pass through the second region 122.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 simultaneously. Specifically, the drive controller 160 rotates the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 while rotating the reference point P of the shutter member 131 until the rotation angle reaches 20 ° from the rotation angle 0 °. Until the rotation angle reaches 200 °. Thus, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the first region 121 after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 0 ° and until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 20 °. The diffracted light L1-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the second region 122.

 図7(a)~(c)を参照して説明したように、駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120を駆動して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2が透過部材141を透過する際の、透過部材141の領域を変化させる。これにより、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2によって生じる干渉縞の方向は変化せずに、回折光L1-1と回折光L1-2との位相差が3通りに変化する。すなわち、駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120を駆動して、干渉縞の方向が所定方向の際に位相差を変化させる。 As described with reference to FIGS. 7A to 7C, the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to generate the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2. Changes the region of the transmissive member 141 when the light passes through the transmissive member 141. Thereby, the direction of the interference fringes generated by the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 does not change, and the phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 changes in three ways. That is, the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to change the phase difference when the direction of the interference fringes is a predetermined direction.

 ここまで図7(a)~(c)を参照して、駆動制御部160が干渉縞の位相差を制御する仕組みの一例を説明した。次に、図8、図9を参照して、駆動制御部160が干渉縞の方向を制御する仕組みの一例について説明する。 Up to this point, an example of a mechanism by which the drive control unit 160 controls the phase difference of the interference fringes has been described with reference to FIGS. 7 (a) to (c). Next, an example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160 controls the direction of interference fringes will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

[干渉縞の方向の制御]
 図8は、本実施形態の光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120の第2の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。駆動制御部160は、上述した図7(a)に示す状態から、図8(a)に示す状態になるように、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを同期させて回転駆動する。すなわち、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを同期させて回転駆動することにより、干渉縞の方向を制御する。具体的には、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを同期させて、光線束の進行方向に対して左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動する。このとき、回折格子111から射出される各回折光の回転角は変化しない。このため、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とが左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動されてその回転角が0°から60°に変化すると、シャッター部材131を通過する光線束が、図7(a)に示す回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2から、図8(a)に示す回折光L2-1および回折光L2-2に切り替わる。したがって、透過部材141から射出される回折光の角度が、回転角60°左回りに変位する。これにより、対物レンズ154に入射する回折光の角度が、回転角60°左回りに変位するため、干渉縞の方向が回転角60°左回りに変位する。
 この図8(a)に示す状態においても、図7(a)に示す状態と同様に、回折光が通過部ATを通過し始めてから、シャッター部材131が連続的に20°回転する間、回折光が通過部ATを通過し続ける。具体的には、シャッター部材131が連続的に回転して、基準点Pが回転角60°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角80°に達するまでの間、回転角60°の位置に入射する回折光L2-1は、第1通過部ATaを通過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Pが回転角60°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角80°に達するまでの間、回転角240°の位置に入射する回折光L2-2は、第2通過部ATbを通過し続ける。
 また、透過部材141が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Qが回転角40°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角80°に達するまでの間、回転角60°の位置に入射する回折光L2-1は、第2領域122を透過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Qが回転角40°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角80°に達するまでの間、回転角240°の位置に入射する回折光L2-2は、第1領域121を透過し続ける。
 したがって、基準点Pが回転角60°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角80°に達するまでの間、回折光L2-1は、第1通過部ATaと第2領域122とを通過し続け、回折光L2-2は、第2通過部ATbと第1領域121とを通過し続ける。
[Control of interference fringe direction]
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a second positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment. The drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization with each other so that the state shown in FIG. 7A is changed to the state shown in FIG. 8A. That is, the drive control unit 160 controls the direction of the interference fringes by rotationally driving the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization. Specifically, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle. At this time, the rotation angle of each diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 111 does not change. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are driven to rotate counterclockwise and the rotation angle changes from 0 ° to 60 °, the light flux passing through the shutter member 131 is changed to FIG. The diffracted light L1-1 and diffracted light L1-2 shown in FIG. 8 are switched to the diffracted light L2-1 and diffracted light L2-2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the angle of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is displaced counterclockwise by a rotation angle of 60 °. As a result, the angle of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is displaced counterclockwise by 60 °, and the direction of the interference fringes is displaced counterclockwise by 60 °.
Also in the state shown in FIG. 8A, as in the state shown in FIG. 7A, the diffraction is performed while the shutter member 131 continuously rotates by 20 ° after the diffracted light starts to pass through the passing portion AT. The light continues to pass through the passing part AT. Specifically, the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated so that the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 60 ° and the reference point P reaches the rotation angle of 80 °. The incident diffracted light L2-1 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa. Similarly, the diffracted light L2-2 incident on the rotation angle 240 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 60 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 80 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb.
Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 60 ° after the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 40 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 80 °. The diffracted light L2-1 continues to pass through the second region 122. Similarly, the diffracted light L2-2 incident on the rotation angle 240 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 40 ° to the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 80 ° is the first diffracted light L2-2. It continues to pass through the region 121.
Therefore, the diffracted light L2-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 80 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 60 °. Subsequently, the diffracted light L2-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.

 図9は、本実施形態の光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120の第3の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。駆動制御部160は、上述した図8(a)に示す状態から、図9(a)に示す状態になるように、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを同期させて回転駆動する。このとき、回折格子111から射出される各回折光の回転角は変化しない。このため、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とが左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動されてその回転角が60°から120°に変化すると、シャッター部材131を通過する光線束が、図8(a)に示す回折光L2-1および回折光L2-2から、図9(a)に示す回折光L3-1および回折光L3-2に切り替わる。したがって、透過部材141から射出される回折光の角度が、図8(a)に示す場合に対して回転角60°左回りにさらに変位する。これにより、対物レンズ154に入射する回折光の角度が、回転角60°左回りにさらに変位するため、干渉縞の方向が回転角60°左回りにさらに変位する。このようにして、駆動制御部160は、干渉縞の方向を制御する。 FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a third positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment. The drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization with each other so that the state shown in FIG. 9A is changed to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the rotation angle of each diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 111 does not change. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are driven to rotate counterclockwise and the rotation angle changes from 60 ° to 120 °, the light flux passing through the shutter member 131 is changed to FIG. The diffracted light L2-1 and diffracted light L2-2 shown in FIG. 9 are switched to the diffracted light L3-1 and diffracted light L3-2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the angle of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is further displaced counterclockwise by 60 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG. As a result, the angle of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is further displaced counterclockwise by a rotation angle of 60 °, so that the direction of the interference fringes is further displaced counterclockwise by a rotation angle of 60 °. In this way, the drive control unit 160 controls the direction of the interference fringes.

 すなわち、駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120を駆動して、位相差が所定の位相差の際に干渉縞の方向を変化させる。 That is, the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to change the direction of the interference fringes when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.

 この図9(a)に示す状態においても、図7(a)および図8(a)に示す状態と同様に、回折光が通過部ATを通過し始めてから、シャッター部材131が連続的に20°回転する間、回折光が通過部ATを通過し続ける。具体的には、シャッター部材131が連続的に回転して、基準点Pが回転角120°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回転角120°の位置に入射する回折光L3-1は、第1通過部ATaを通過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Pが回転角120°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回転角300°の位置に入射する回折光L3-2は、第2通過部ATbを通過し続ける。
 また、透過部材141が連続的に回転した場合に、基準点Qが回転角100°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回転角120°の位置に入射する回折光L3-1は、第2領域122を透過し続ける。これと同様に、基準点Qが回転角100°に達してから、基準点Qが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回転角300°の位置に入射する回折光L3-2は、第1領域121を透過し続ける。
 したがって、基準点Pが回転角120°に達してから、基準点Pが回転角140°に達するまでの間、回折光L3-1は、第1通過部ATaと第2領域122とを通過し続け、回折光L3-2は、第2通過部ATbと第1領域121とを通過し続ける。
Also in the state shown in FIG. 9A, as in the state shown in FIGS. 7A and 8A, after the diffracted light starts to pass through the passage portion AT, the shutter member 131 continuously 20 During the rotation, the diffracted light continues to pass through the passing portion AT. Specifically, the shutter member 131 is continuously rotated so that the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 120 ° and the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 140 ° until the reference angle P reaches the rotation angle 120 °. The incident diffracted light L3-1 continues to pass through the first passage portion ATa. Similarly, the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° from the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 120 ° to the reference point P reaching the rotation angle 140 ° Continue to pass through the passing portion ATb.
Further, when the transmission member 141 is continuously rotated, the light enters the position at the rotation angle of 120 ° from the time when the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle of 140 °. The diffracted light L3-1 continues to pass through the second region 122. Similarly, the diffracted light L3-2 incident on the rotation angle 300 ° from the reference point Q reaching the rotation angle 100 ° until the reference point Q reaches the rotation angle 140 ° is the first diffracted light L3-2. It continues to pass through the region 121.
Therefore, the diffracted light L3-1 passes through the first passage portion ATa and the second region 122 until the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 140 ° after the reference point P reaches the rotation angle 120 °. Subsequently, the diffracted light L3-2 continues to pass through the second passage portion ATb and the first region 121.

 [干渉縞の方向と位相との同期制御]
 図10は、本実施形態の駆動制御部160による制御シーケンスの一例を示すシーケンス図である。駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の露光動作(または、撮像動作)と同期させて、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とを回転駆動する。
[Synchronous control of interference fringe direction and phase]
FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a control sequence by the drive control unit 160 of the present embodiment. The drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate in synchronization with the exposure operation (or imaging operation) of the imaging unit 210.

 駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の露光動作にあわせた所定の回転速度でシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、シャッター部材131の通過部ATの回転角が変化し、回折光L1、回折光L2、および回折光L3が順次、シャッター部材131を通過する。ここで、シャッター部材131は、所定の大きさの通過部ATを備えている。このため、シャッター部材131が回転し続けている場合に、所定の期間、回折光が継続的に通過する。以下、シャッター部材131は、中心角の大きさが20°の通過部ATを備えており、透過部材141は、中心角の大きさが40°の第2領域122を備えている場合について、具体的に説明する。ここで、透過部材141の第2領域122の弧の両端を通る2つの半径が作る角を第2領域122の中心角とする。 The drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 at a predetermined rotational speed in accordance with the exposure operation of the imaging unit 210. As a result, the rotation angle of the passing portion AT of the shutter member 131 changes, and the diffracted light L1, the diffracted light L2, and the diffracted light L3 sequentially pass through the shutter member 131. Here, the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT having a predetermined size. For this reason, when the shutter member 131 continues to rotate, the diffracted light continuously passes for a predetermined period. Hereinafter, the shutter member 131 includes a passage portion AT having a central angle of 20 °, and the transmission member 141 includes a second region 122 having a central angle of 40 °. I will explain it. Here, an angle formed by two radii passing through both ends of the arc of the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is defined as a central angle of the second region 122.

 はじめに、タイミングT1~T3における駆動制御部160の制御動作について説明する。このタイミングT1~T3においては、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131の回転速度と、透過部材141の回転速度とを一致させて、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを回転駆動する。
 具体的には、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第1の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT1において、シャッター部材131が回転角0°になるように、シャッター部材131を回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1において、図7(a)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角0°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第1の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT1’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置が、回転角20°になるように、タイミングT1からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角20°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131を回転駆動する。上述したように、シャッター部材131は、中心角の大きさが20°である通過部ATを備えているため、タイミングT1からタイミングT1’の間において、回折光L1がシャッター部材131を通過する。
First, the control operation of the drive control unit 160 at the timings T1 to T3 will be described. At timings T1 to T3, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate by matching the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 with the rotation speed of the transmission member 141.
Specifically, the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 0 ° at timing T1, which is the first exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. That is, at timing T1, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 0 ° as shown in FIG. To drive. Further, the drive control unit 160 starts the shutter member from the timing T1 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 becomes a rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′ that is the first exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. 131 is continuously rotated. That is, the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′. As described above, since the shutter member 131 includes the passage portion AT having a central angle of 20 °, the diffracted light L1 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T1 and the timing T1 ′.

 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置が、回転角0°になるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1において、図7(a)に示すように透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角0°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置が、回転角20°になるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角20°の位置とが一致するようにして、タイミングT1から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。上述したように、透過部材141は、中心角の大きさが40°である第2領域122を備えている。このため、タイミングT1からタイミングT1’の間において、回折光L1-1が第2領域122を、回折光L1-2が第1領域121を、それぞれ通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT1からタイミングT1’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。 At this time, the drive control unit 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 is 0 ° at the timing T1. That is, at timing T1, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 0 ° as shown in FIG. To drive. Further, the drive controller 160 rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 becomes a rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 '. That is, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T1 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 20 ° at the timing T1 ′. . As described above, the transmissive member 141 includes the second region 122 having a central angle of 40 °. For this reason, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the first region 121 between timing T1 and timing T1 '. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T1 and timing T1 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 また、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第2の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT2において、シャッター部材131が回転角60°になるように、タイミングT1’からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2において、図8(a)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角60°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第2の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT2’において、シャッター部材131が回転角80°になるように、タイミングT2からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角80°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT2からタイミングT2’の間において、回折光L2がシャッター部材131を通過する。 The drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T1 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 60 ° at timing T2, which is the second exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T2, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 such that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 60 ° as shown in FIG. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 from timing T2 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 80 ° at timing T2 ′ that is the second exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T2 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 80 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L2 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T2 and the timing T2 '.

 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2において、透過部材141が回転角60°になるように、タイミングT1’から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2において、図8(a)に示すように透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角60°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2’において、透過部材141が回転角80°になるように、タイミングT2から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT2’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角80°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT2からタイミングT2’の間において、回折光L2-1が第2領域122を、回折光L2-2が第1領域121を、それぞれ通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT2からタイミングT2’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。 At this time, the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T1 'so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 60 ° at timing T2. That is, at timing T2, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 60 ° as shown in FIG. The transmission member 141 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T2 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 80 ° at timing T2 '. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the transmission member 141 stop the rotation of the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 80 ° at the timing T2 ′. Is driven to rotate. Thus, the diffracted light L2-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L2-2 passes through the first region 121 between the timing T2 and the timing T2 '. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T2 and timing T2 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 また、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第3の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT3において、シャッター部材131が回転角120°になるように、タイミングT2’からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3において、図9(a)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角120°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。 The drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T2 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 120 ° at timing T3, which is the third exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T3, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 such that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 120 ° as shown in FIG. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping.

 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3において、透過部材141が回転角120°になるように、タイミングT2’から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3において、図9(a)に示すように透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角120°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。 At this time, the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T2 'so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 120 ° at timing T3. That is, at timing T3, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 120 ° as shown in FIG. The transmission member 141 is rotationally driven without stopping.

 なお、撮像部210の露光動作を行うタイミングが一定の時間間隔である場合には、駆動制御部160がシャッター部材131を一定の回転速度で回転駆動することにより、回折光L1~L3がシャッター部材131を通過するタイミングと、撮像部210が露光動作を行うタイミングとを同期させることができる。 When the timing of performing the exposure operation of the imaging unit 210 is a constant time interval, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 to rotate at a constant rotational speed, so that the diffracted lights L1 to L3 are emitted from the shutter member. The timing of passing through 131 can be synchronized with the timing of the imaging unit 210 performing the exposure operation.

 次に、タイミングT3~T7における駆動制御部160の制御動作について説明する。タイミングT3~T7においては、駆動制御部160が透過部材141の回転速度を、シャッター部材131の回転速度よりも低い速度にして回転駆動する制御を行う点において、タイミングT1~T3における制御と異なる。 Next, the control operation of the drive control unit 160 at timings T3 to T7 will be described. The timings T3 to T7 differ from the controls at timings T1 to T3 in that the drive control unit 160 performs control to rotate the transmission member 141 at a speed lower than the rotation speed of the shutter member 131.

 駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3に達すると、透過部材141の回転速度を、シャッター部材131の回転速度の1/4の速度にして、回転駆動する。また、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3’から、撮像部210の第4の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT4’の間において、上述したタイミングT1~T3の間における制御と同様にして、シャッター部材131を駆動する。
 具体的には、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第3の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT3’において、シャッター部材131が回転角140°になるように、タイミングT3からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角140°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT3からタイミングT3’の間において、回折光L3がシャッター部材131を通過する。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3’において、透過部材141が回転角125°になるように、タイミングT3から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角125°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT3からタイミングT3’の間において、回折光L3-1が第2領域122を、回折光L3-2が第1領域121を、それぞれ通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT3からタイミングT3’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。
When reaching the timing T <b> 3, the drive control unit 160 rotates the transmission member 141 at a speed that is ¼ of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131. In addition, the drive control unit 160 performs the shutter member 131 between the timing T3 ′ and the timing T4 ′ that is the fourth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210 in the same manner as the control between the timings T1 to T3 described above. Drive.
Specifically, the drive control unit 160 continuously moves the shutter member 131 from the timing T3 so that the rotation angle of the shutter member 131 is 140 ° at the timing T3 ′ that is the third exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To rotate. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T3 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 140 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L3 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T3 and the timing T3 ′.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T3 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 125 ° at timing T3 ′. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the transmission member 141 stop the rotation of the transmission member 141 so that the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 125 ° at the timing T3 ′. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L3-1 passes through the second region 122 and the diffracted light L3-2 passes through the first region 121 between the timing T3 and the timing T3 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T3 and timing T3 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 また、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4において、シャッター部材131が回転角180°になるように、タイミングT3’からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第4の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT4において、図7(b)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角180°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第4の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT4’において、シャッター部材131が回転角200°になるように、タイミングT4からシャッター部材131を連続低に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角200°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT4からタイミングT4’の間において、回折光L1がシャッター部材131を通過する。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4において、透過部材141が回転角135°になるように、タイミングT3’から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角135°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4’において、透過部材141が回転角140°になるように、タイミングT4から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角140°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT4からタイミングT4’の間において、回折光L1-1、および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT4からタイミングT4’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。
Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 from the timing T3 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 180 ° at the timing T4. That is, the drive control unit 160 at the timing T4 that is the fourth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210, as shown in FIG. 7B, the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 and the position of the rotation angle of 180 °. So that the shutter member 131 is rotated without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131. Further, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 to rotate continuously low from timing T4 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 200 ° at timing T4 ′, which is the fourth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T4 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 200 °. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L1 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T4 and the timing T4 ′.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T3 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 135 ° at timing T4. That is, at timing T4, the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 and the position of the rotation angle 135 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Rotation drive. Furthermore, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T4 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 140 ° at timing T4 ′. That is, at timing T4 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle of 140 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T4 and the timing T4 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T4 and timing T4 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 また、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第5の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT5において、シャッター部材131が回転角240°になるように、タイミングT4’からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT5において、図8(b)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角180°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第5の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT5’において、シャッター部材131が回転角260°になるように、タイミングT5からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT5’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角260°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT5からタイミングT5’の間において、回折光L2がシャッター部材131を通過する。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT5において、透過部材141が回転角150°になるように、タイミングT4’から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT4において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角150°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT5’において、透過部材141が回転角155°になるように、タイミングT5から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT5’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角155°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT5からタイミングT5’の間において、回折光L1-1、および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT5からタイミングT5’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。
In addition, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T4 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 240 ° at timing T5 which is the fifth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T5, the drive controller 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 180 ° as shown in FIG. 8B. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 from timing T5 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 260 ° at timing T5 ′ that is the fifth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincide with the position of the rotation angle 260 ° at the timing T5 ′ so that the rotation of the shutter member 131 is not stopped. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L2 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T5 and the timing T5 ′.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T4 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 150 ° at timing T5. That is, at timing T4, the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmissive member 141 and the position of the rotation angle 150 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmissive member 141. Rotation drive. Furthermore, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates the transmission member 141 from timing T5 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 155 ° at timing T5 ′. That is, at timing T5 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle 155 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate. Thus, both the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T5 and the timing T5 ′. Therefore, during exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T5 and timing T5 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 また、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第6の露光開始タイミングであるタイミングT6において、シャッター部材131が回転角300°になるように、タイミングT5’からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6において、図9(b)に示すようにシャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角300°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、撮像部210の第6の露光終了タイミングであるタイミングT6’において、シャッター部材131が回転角320°になるように、タイミングT6からシャッター部材131を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6’において、シャッター部材131の基準点Pの位置と、回転角320°の位置とが一致するようにして、シャッター部材131の回転を停止させることなくシャッター部材131を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT6からタイミングT6’の間において、回折光L3がシャッター部材131を通過する。
 このとき、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6において、透過部材141が回転角165°になるように、タイミングT5’から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角165°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。さらに、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6’において、透過部材141が回転角170°になるように、タイミングT6から透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。すなわち駆動制御部160は、タイミングT6’において、透過部材141の基準点Qの位置と、回転角170°の位置とが一致するようにして、透過部材141の回転を停止させることなく透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、タイミングT6からタイミングT6’の間において、回折光L1-1、および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を通過する。したがって、撮像部210の露光中(タイミングT6からタイミングT6’の間)において、シャッター部材131と透過部材141は、駆動制御部160により連続的に回転されるが、照明領域LAに形成される干渉縞の方向、及び位相は一定となる。
Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the shutter member 131 to rotate from timing T5 ′ so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 300 ° at timing T6, which is the sixth exposure start timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, at timing T6, the drive control unit 160 rotates the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle 300 ° as shown in FIG. 9B. The shutter member 131 is rotationally driven without stopping. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 from the timing T6 so that the shutter member 131 has a rotation angle of 320 ° at the timing T6 ′ that is the sixth exposure end timing of the imaging unit 210. To do. That is, the drive control unit 160 makes the shutter member 131 stop at the timing T6 ′ without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 so that the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 131 coincides with the position of the rotation angle of 320 °. Is driven to rotate. Accordingly, the diffracted light L3 passes through the shutter member 131 between the timing T6 and the timing T6 ′.
At this time, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 from timing T5 ′ so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 165 ° at timing T6. That is, at timing T6, the drive control unit 160 causes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 and the position of the rotation angle of 165 ° to coincide with each other without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Rotation drive. Further, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate from timing T6 so that the transmission member 141 has a rotation angle of 170 ° at timing T6 ′. That is, at timing T6 ′, the drive control unit 160 makes the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 141 coincide with the position of the rotation angle of 170 ° without stopping the rotation of the transmission member 141. Is driven to rotate. Thereby, the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 pass through the first region 121 between the timing T6 and the timing T6 ′. Therefore, during the exposure of the imaging unit 210 (between timing T6 and timing T6 ′), the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated by the drive control unit 160, but interference formed in the illumination area LA. The direction and phase of the stripes are constant.

 なお、タイミングT7~T9’における駆動制御部160の制御動作については、タイミングT1~T3’における制御と同様である。すなわち、タイミングT7~T9’においては、タイミングT1~T3’において射出される+1次回折光と-1次回折光の位相差が互いに逆である点が異なるが、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを同期させて制御する点において同様である。このため、タイミングT7~T9’における駆動制御部160の制御動作については、詳細な説明を省略する。 The control operation of the drive control unit 160 at timings T7 to T9 'is the same as the control at timings T1 to T3'. That is, at the timings T7 to T9 ′, the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 are synchronized with each other except that the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light emitted at the timings T1 to T3 ′ is opposite to each other. This is the same in that it is controlled. Therefore, detailed description of the control operation of the drive control unit 160 at the timings T7 to T9 'is omitted.

 そして、演算部220は、方向、及び位相差の異なる9種類の干渉縞を投影した標本SPの9枚の画像を生成し、周知の方法で生成した9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成する。なお、駆動制御部160によるシャッター部材131、及び透過部材141の回転駆動は、撮像部210が9種類全ての標本SPの像を撮像するまで停止することなく継続される。また、9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成するまでの時間が短ければ、駆動制御部160によるシャッター部材131、及び透過部材141の回転駆動は、演算部220が9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成するまで継続されることと言い換えることもできる。 Then, the calculation unit 220 generates nine images of the specimen SP on which nine types of interference fringes having different directions and phase differences are projected, and generates a super-resolution image from the nine images generated by a known method. To do. The rotation drive of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160 is continued without stopping until the imaging unit 210 captures all nine types of specimen SP images. In addition, if the time until generation of a super-resolution image from nine images is short, the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160 causes the calculation unit 220 to perform super-resolution from the nine images. In other words, it can be continued until an image is generated.

 このようにして駆動制御部160は、光線束生成部110と位相付与部120とを駆動して、第1光線束と第2光線束とのうち、一方の光線束を第1領域121(基準相領域)に入射させ、他方の光線束を位相変調領域122に入射させつつ、第1領域121(基準相領域)内における入射させる位置と、位相変調領域122内における入射させる位置とを変化させることにより、位相差が所定の位相差の際に干渉縞の方向を変化させる。 In this way, the drive control unit 160 drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to set one of the first light beam and the second light beam to the first region 121 (reference). The incident position in the first region 121 (reference phase region) and the incident position in the phase modulation region 122 are changed while the other light beam is incident on the phase modulation region 122. Thus, the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.

 また、このようにして駆動制御部160は、照明光学系150(干渉光学系)の光軸を回転中心として光線束生成部110を回転させることにより、当該光軸の周りに沿って、第1光線束と第2光線束との光路を変化させて干渉縞の方向を制御する。 Further, in this way, the drive control unit 160 rotates the light beam generation unit 110 about the optical axis of the illumination optical system 150 (interference optical system) as a rotation center, so that the first along the optical axis. The direction of the interference fringes is controlled by changing the optical path between the light beam and the second light beam.

 以上説明したように、本実施形態の観察装置1は、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120をそれぞれ駆動して、干渉縞の方向と位相差との少なくとも一方を制御する駆動制御部160を備えている。この駆動制御部160は、光線束選択部及び位相付与部120を駆動して、第1光線束または第2光線束の少なくとも一方を位相付与部120に入射させ、かつ、入射させる位相付与部120上の位置を変化させることにより、前位相差が所定の位相差の際に干渉縞の方向を変化させる。この駆動制御部160を備えることにより、観察装置1は、次に示す効果を奏する。 As described above, the observation apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment drives the light flux generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120, and controls the drive control unit 160 that controls at least one of the direction of interference fringes and the phase difference. I have. The drive control unit 160 drives the light beam selecting unit and the phase applying unit 120 to cause at least one of the first light beam and the second light beam to enter the phase applying unit 120 and to cause the phase applying unit 120 to enter the phase applying unit 120. By changing the upper position, the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the previous phase difference is a predetermined phase difference. By providing this drive control unit 160, the observation apparatus 1 has the following effects.

 すなわち、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを、それぞれ連続的に回転駆動する。これにより、駆動制御部160は、対物レンズ154に射出される回折光L1~L3を相互に切換える制御を行う。このとき、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131および透過部材141の回転を停止させずに回折光を切換える。ここで、従来のように、回転しているシャッター部材131や透過部材141を停止させてから、所定の位相差で干渉した所定方向の干渉縞を標本SPに形成して標本SPの像の撮像を繰り返し(例えば、±1次回折光による干渉縞の方向を3方向に変化させ、かつ各方向の干渉縞について、±1次回折光の位相差を進相・同相・遅相の3種類に変化させて9回の撮像を繰り返す)、得られた複数の画像(例えば、9枚の画像)から超解像画像を生成する場合には、回転しているシャッター部材131や透過部材141を停止させるまでの時間や、停止しているシャッター部材131や透過部材141を所望の回転速度まで加速させる時間が掛かるため、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間が長くなり観察する効率が低くなる。この観察装置1が備える駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131および透過部材141の回転を停止することなく、干渉させる光線束の位相差、及び干渉縞の方向を切換えることができるため、シャッター部材131および透過部材141の停止、及び加速するための時間が掛からないため、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができ、標本SPを効率的に観察することができるようになる。 That is, the drive control unit 160 drives the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 to rotate continuously. Accordingly, the drive control unit 160 performs control to switch the diffracted lights L1 to L3 emitted to the objective lens 154 to each other. At this time, the drive control unit 160 switches the diffracted light without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141. Here, as in the past, after stopping the rotating shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141, an interference fringe in a predetermined direction that interferes with a predetermined phase difference is formed on the sample SP to capture an image of the sample SP. (For example, change the direction of the interference fringe by ± 1st order diffracted light in 3 directions, and change the phase difference of ± 1st order diffracted light into 3 types of fast, in-phase, and slow phase for each direction) In the case where a super-resolution image is generated from a plurality of obtained images (for example, nine images), the rotating shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141 are stopped. And the time required to accelerate the stopped shutter member 131 and transmission member 141 to a desired rotational speed, the time until the super-resolution image is generated becomes longer and the observation efficiency becomes lower. The drive control unit 160 included in the observation apparatus 1 can switch the phase difference of the beam bundle to be interfered and the direction of the interference fringes without stopping the rotation of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141, and thus the shutter member 131. In addition, since it does not take time to stop and accelerate the transmission member 141, it is possible to shorten the time until the generation of the super-resolution image, and to efficiently observe the specimen SP.

 また、駆動制御部160は、透過部材141の回転速度を可変にして、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141とをそれぞれ連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT1~T3の間において、シャッター部材131の回転速度と、透過部材141の回転速度とを一致させて連続的に回転駆動する。また、駆動制御部160は、タイミングT3~T7の間において、シャッター部材131の回転速度の1/4の速度にして、透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動する。駆動制御部160は、タイミングT7~T9’の間において、シャッター部材131の回転速度と、透過部材141の回転速度とを一致させて連続的に回転駆動する。上述したように、駆動制御部160は、±1次回折光による干渉縞の方向を、第1方向D1~第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した3方向に変化させつつ、各方向の干渉縞について、±1次回折光の位相差を進相・同相・遅相の3種類に変化させる。すなわち、駆動制御部160は、干渉縞の方向と、回折光の位相差との組み合わせを、9通りに変化させる。ここで、透過部材141の回転速度を可変にしない場合、干渉縞の方向および回折光の位相差を、この9通りに変化させるためには、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とのうち、少なくとも一方の回転が停止する期間が生じる。この場合には、回転している状態から停止するまでの時間と、停止している状態から所望の速度まで加速するための時間が必要となるため、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間が長くなる。したがって、標本SPを効率良く観察することができない。本実施形態の駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを停止させることなく、速度を可変にして回転駆動しながら、回折光の位相差と、回折光による干渉縞の方向とを変化させることができる。したがって、この観察装置1によれば、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを停止することなく超解像画像を生成することができるため、標本SPを効率よく観察することができる。
 なお、この一例においては、透過部材141の回転速度のみを可変にする場合について説明したが、駆動制御部160は、シャッター部材131と、透過部材141との少なくとも一方の回転速度を可変にしても、上述の効果を奏することができる。また、シャッター部材131と透過部材141の両方の回転速度を可変にしてもよい。
Further, the drive controller 160 continuously rotates the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141 while changing the rotation speed of the transmissive member 141. Specifically, the drive controller 160 continuously rotates and drives the shutter member 131 at the same time between the timings T1 and T3 with the rotational speed of the shutter member 131 and the rotational speed of the transmission member 141 matched. In addition, the drive control unit 160 continuously drives the transmission member 141 to rotate at a speed that is ¼ of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 and T7. The drive control unit 160 drives to rotate continuously with the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 and the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 matched between the timings T7 to T9 ′. As described above, the drive controller 160 changes the direction of the interference fringes by ± first-order diffracted light into the three directions diffracted by the periodic structure of the first direction D1 to the third direction D3, and the interference fringes in each direction. The phase difference of the ± first-order diffracted light is changed into three types: fast phase, in-phase, and slow phase. That is, the drive control unit 160 changes nine combinations of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference of the diffracted light. Here, when the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is not variable, in order to change the direction of the interference fringe and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways, at least one of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 is used. There is a period during which the rotation of the motor stops. In this case, a time from the rotating state to the stop and a time to accelerate from the stopped state to the desired speed are required, so the time to generate the super-resolution image is required. become longer. Therefore, the sample SP cannot be observed efficiently. The drive control unit 160 of the present embodiment determines the phase difference of the diffracted light and the direction of the interference fringes due to the diffracted light while rotating and driving at a variable speed without stopping the shutter member 131 and the transmissive member 141. Can be changed. Therefore, according to the observation apparatus 1, since the super-resolution image can be generated without stopping the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141, the specimen SP can be observed efficiently.
In this example, the case where only the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is variable has been described. However, the drive control unit 160 may change the rotation speed of at least one of the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141. The above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the rotational speeds of both the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 may be variable.

 また、生細胞を観察するいわゆる、ライブセルイメージングにおいて、従来は、超解像画像の生成までに長時間かかっていたため、超解像画像を生成するまでに生細胞が動くと、所望の解像度の超解像画像を得ることができなかった。一方、観察装置1では、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができるため、動きが早く今まで所望の解像度を得ることができなかった生細胞であっても、その超解像画像を所望の解像度で生成することができるようになる。 Also, in so-called live cell imaging for observing live cells, conventionally, it took a long time to generate a super-resolution image, so if the live cells move before generating a super-resolution image, the desired resolution is achieved. A super-resolution image could not be obtained. On the other hand, since the observation apparatus 1 can shorten the time required to generate a super-resolution image, even a living cell that has been fast moving and has not been able to obtain a desired resolution until now has its super-resolution. An image can be generated at a desired resolution.

 [変形例]
 次に、シャッター部材131の変形例について説明する。図11(a)、図11(b)は、それぞれ、シャッター部材131の変形例を示す斜視図である。図11(a)に示すシャッター部材131は、第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbのそれぞれの平面形状が円状である。第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbは、回転軸AX3からの放射方向において回転軸AX3から離れるにつれて、放射方向に直交する方向の寸法が大きくなり、この寸法が極大になった後に小さくなる。図11(b)に示すシャッター部材131は、第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbのそれぞれの平面形状が扇状である。第1通過部ATaと第2通過部ATbは、それぞれ、シャッター部材131の外周まで配置されている。このように、第1通過部ATaの形状と第2通過部ATの形状は、適宜、変更可能である。
[Modification]
Next, a modified example of the shutter member 131 will be described. FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B are perspective views showing modifications of the shutter member 131, respectively. As for the shutter member 131 shown to Fig.11 (a), each planar shape of 1st passage part ATa and 2nd passage part ATb is circular. As the distance from the rotation axis AX3 in the radial direction from the rotation axis AX3, the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb increase in size in the direction orthogonal to the radial direction, and then decrease after the size becomes maximum. . In the shutter member 131 shown in FIG. 11B, the planar shape of each of the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb is a fan shape. The first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb are disposed up to the outer periphery of the shutter member 131, respectively. Thus, the shape of the first passage portion ATa and the shape of the second passage portion AT can be changed as appropriate.

 次に、照明装置10の変形例について説明する。図12は、変形例の照明装置10の概略構成を示す図である。図12には、光源装置100からシャッター部材131に至る光路に配置される構成要素を示した。 Next, a modified example of the lighting device 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a lighting device 10 according to a modification. FIG. 12 shows components disposed in the optical path from the light source device 100 to the shutter member 131.

 本変形例の照明装置10は、回折格子111が生成した光線束の偏光状態を直線偏光にする波長板140Aを備える。照明光学系150は、波長板140Aが直線偏光にした光線束を図1などに示した標本SPの近傍においてS偏光にして、干渉縞を生成する。 The illumination device 10 of the present modification includes a wave plate 140A that changes the polarization state of the light beam generated by the diffraction grating 111 to linearly polarized light. The illumination optical system 150 generates interference fringes by converting the light beam, which is converted into linearly polarized light by the wave plate 140A, into S-polarized light in the vicinity of the specimen SP shown in FIG.

 図12において、光源装置100が射出する光は、例えば、同図に示す方向PD1を偏光方向とする第1直線偏光である。照明装置10は、方向PD1を変更方向とする第1直線偏光を、第1直線偏光と偏光方向が異なる第2直線偏光に変換し、第2直線偏光の照明光ILにより照明領域LAを照明する。この第2直線偏光の偏光方向は、例えば、同図に示す方向PD2である。ここでは、第1直線偏光は、図1などに示した直線偏光であり、第2直線偏光は、標本SPに対してS偏光である。 In FIG. 12, the light emitted from the light source device 100 is, for example, first linearly polarized light whose polarization direction is a direction PD1 shown in FIG. The illumination device 10 converts the first linearly polarized light whose direction is the direction PD1 into second linearly polarized light having a polarization direction different from that of the first linearly polarized light, and illuminates the illumination area LA with the illumination light IL of the second linearly polarized light. . The polarization direction of the second linearly polarized light is, for example, a direction PD2 shown in FIG. Here, the first linearly polarized light is the linearly polarized light shown in FIG. 1 and the like, and the second linearly polarized light is S-polarized light with respect to the specimen SP.

 照明装置10は、1/4波長板142及び1/4波長板143を含む。この照明装置10において、シャッター部材131は、回折格子111と図1に示したリレーレンズ152との間の光路に配置されている。1/4波長板142は、光源装置100と回折格子111との間の光路に配置されている。1/4波長板142は、光源からの第1直線偏光の偏光方向に対する相対的な回転角が固定されている。1/4波長板142の進相軸または遅相軸(図12に示す軸AXa)は、第1直線偏光の偏光方向に対して約45°の角度で配置されている。光源101からの光は、1/4波長板142を通って円偏光に変換されて、回折格子111に入射する。 The illumination device 10 includes a quarter wavelength plate 142 and a quarter wavelength plate 143. In this illuminating device 10, the shutter member 131 is disposed in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the relay lens 152 shown in FIG. The quarter wavelength plate 142 is disposed in the optical path between the light source device 100 and the diffraction grating 111. The quarter wave plate 142 has a fixed rotation angle relative to the polarization direction of the first linearly polarized light from the light source. The fast axis or slow axis (axis AXa shown in FIG. 12) of the quarter wavelength plate 142 is arranged at an angle of about 45 ° with respect to the polarization direction of the first linearly polarized light. Light from the light source 101 is converted into circularly polarized light through the quarter-wave plate 142 and is incident on the diffraction grating 111.

 1/4波長板143は、波長板140Bの少なくとも一部である。1/4波長板143は、シャッター部材131に対する相対的な回転角が固定されている。本変形例において、シャッター部材131は回転可能であり、1/4波長板143は、シャッター部材131と同期して回転可能である。1/4波長板143は、シャッター部材131から離れた位置に配置されており、シャッター部材131とは別の駆動部により駆動される。1/4波長板143の駆動部は、図1に示した駆動制御部160によって制御され、1/4波長板143とシャッター部材131の通過部ATとの相対的な回転角が保持されるように、1/4波長板143を回転駆動する。1/4波長板143の進相軸または遅相軸(図12に示す軸AXb)は、シャッター部材131の第1通過部ATaの中心と第2通過部ATbの中心を結ぶ線に対して、約45°の角度で配置されている。回折格子111で回折した回折光は、円偏光になっており、1/4波長板143を透過して標本SPに対してS偏光に変換される。 The quarter wave plate 143 is at least a part of the wave plate 140B. The relative rotation angle of the quarter-wave plate 143 with respect to the shutter member 131 is fixed. In this modification, the shutter member 131 can rotate, and the quarter-wave plate 143 can rotate in synchronization with the shutter member 131. The quarter wavelength plate 143 is disposed at a position away from the shutter member 131 and is driven by a drive unit different from the shutter member 131. The drive unit of the quarter-wave plate 143 is controlled by the drive control unit 160 shown in FIG. 1 so that the relative rotation angle between the quarter-wave plate 143 and the passage part AT of the shutter member 131 is maintained. The quarter wave plate 143 is driven to rotate. The fast axis or slow axis (axis AXb shown in FIG. 12) of the quarter-wave plate 143 is relative to the line connecting the center of the first passage portion ATa and the center of the second passage portion ATb of the shutter member 131. It is arranged at an angle of about 45 °. The diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 is circularly polarized light, is transmitted through the quarter-wave plate 143, and is converted to S-polarized light with respect to the specimen SP.

 なお、シャッター部材131の駆動部は、1/4波長板143の駆動部の少なくとも一部を含んでいてもよい。また、1/4波長板143は、シャッター部材131に取り付けられており、シャッター部材131との相対位置が固定されていてもよい。 The driving unit of the shutter member 131 may include at least a part of the driving unit of the quarter wavelength plate 143. Further, the quarter wavelength plate 143 may be attached to the shutter member 131, and the relative position to the shutter member 131 may be fixed.

 以上説明したように、照明装置10は、光線束生成部110が生成した光線束の偏光状態を直線偏光にする直線偏光部を備えている。また、照明光学系150(干渉光学系)は、直線偏光部が直線偏光にした光線束を、標本の近傍においてS偏光にして干渉縞を生成する。光線束をS偏光にすることにより、照明装置10は、標本の近傍における干渉縞のコントラストを向上させることができる。 As described above, the illumination device 10 includes the linear polarization unit that changes the polarization state of the light beam generated by the light beam generation unit 110 to linearly polarized light. Further, the illumination optical system 150 (interference optical system) generates an interference fringe by converting the light beam, which has been linearly polarized by the linearly polarized light portion, into S-polarized light in the vicinity of the sample. The illumination device 10 can improve the contrast of the interference fringes in the vicinity of the sample by using the S-polarized light beam.

 [第2の実施形態]
 以下、図面を参照して、本発明の第2の実施形態を説明する。なお、上述した第1の実施形態と同様である構成及び動作については、説明を簡略化あるいは省略する。
 図13は第2の実施形態に係る観察装置1aを示す図、図14は、本実施形態に係る回折格子111を示す図である。本実施形態の観察装置1aは、照明装置10aの構成が第1の実施形態と異なる。本実施形態の観察装置1aは、照明装置10aが、複数の方向ではなく1方向に周期構造を有する回折格子112を備える点で第1の実施形態と異なる。
また、シャッター部材131のような形状の通過部AT(第1通過部ATa及び第2通過部ATb)ではなく、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周囲に沿って回折格子112で回折された+1次回折光と-1次回折光とを通過させる円環状の開口の通過部(不図示)を有するシャッター部材133を備える点で第1の実施形態と異なる。また、本実施形態の照明装置10aは、シャッター部材133を回転駆動させず、回折格子112と透過部材141とを回転駆動させる駆動制御部160aを備える点で第1の実施形態と異なる。なお、シャッター部材133により回折格子112からの0次回折光は遮光される。なお、シャッター部材133の通過部(不図示)の形状は円環状の開口に限られず、0次回折光を遮光し、±1次回折光を通過させる通過部を有していればよい。
[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the description of the configuration and operation that are the same as those of the first embodiment described above is simplified or omitted.
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1a according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a diffraction grating 111 according to this embodiment. The observation device 1a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the illumination device 10a. The observation apparatus 1a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the illumination apparatus 10a includes a diffraction grating 112 having a periodic structure in one direction instead of a plurality of directions.
Further, +1 is diffracted by the diffraction grating 112 along the periphery of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, not the passage portion AT (the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb) having a shape like the shutter member 131. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a shutter member 133 having a circular opening passing portion (not shown) that allows the passage of the first-order diffracted light and the minus first-order diffracted light is provided. The illumination device 10a of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the illumination device 10a includes a drive control unit 160a that does not rotate the shutter member 133 but rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141. Note that the zero-order diffracted light from the diffraction grating 112 is shielded by the shutter member 133. Note that the shape of the passage portion (not shown) of the shutter member 133 is not limited to the annular opening, and it is only necessary to have a passage portion that shields the 0th-order diffracted light and allows the ± 1st-order diffracted light to pass.

 図14に示すように、回折格子112は、1方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を1方向に沿って分布する第1光線束及び第2光線束を含む複数の光線束に分割する。すなわち、回折格子112は、回折方向が1方向の1方向回折格子である。回折格子112は、回転軸AX5の周りで回転可能である。本実施形態において、回折格子112の回転軸AX5は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と同軸である。 As shown in FIG. 14, the diffraction grating 112 has a periodic structure in one direction, and divides an incident light bundle into a plurality of light bundles including a first light bundle and a second light bundle distributed along one direction. To do. That is, the diffraction grating 112 is a one-way diffraction grating having one diffraction direction. The diffraction grating 112 can rotate around the rotation axis AX5. In the present embodiment, the rotation axis AX5 of the diffraction grating 112 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.

 回折格子112は、電動モーターなどの不図示の駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160aに制御されて、回折格子112を回転させる。駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の駆動部を制御することによって、回折格子112の回転角を制御できる。 The diffraction grating 112 is rotated by torque supplied from a drive unit (not shown) such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160 a to rotate the diffraction grating 112. The drive control unit 160 a can control the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112.

 図15は、回折格子112で回折した各回折光の集光により形成される共役面OS1におけるスポット光の位置を示す図である。図15に示すように、+1次回折光のスポットの位置D1は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して、-1次回折光のスポットの位置D2と点対称になる。+1次回折光のスポットの位置D1と-1次回折光のスポットの位置D2は、回折格子112の回転に伴って、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して互いに点対称な関係を保ちながら、光軸AX1の周りで回転するように変化する。 FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the position of the spot light on the conjugate plane OS1 formed by condensing each diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 112. FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, the spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light is point-symmetric with respect to the position D2 of the spot of the −1st order diffracted light with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light and the position D2 of the spot of the −1st order diffracted light are maintained in point symmetry with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 as the diffraction grating 112 rotates, while maintaining the optical axis AX1. Changes to rotate around.

 図13の説明に戻り、透過部材141は、第1の実施形態で説明したように回転可能である。駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の駆動部および透過部材141の駆動部を制御することにより、回折格子112と透過部材141との相対的な回転角を制御できる。透過部材141は、共役面OS1の位置に配置されており、図15に示した+1次回折光のスポットの位置D1と-1次回折光のスポットの位置D2は、透過部材141上のスポットの位置に対応する。すなわち、透過部材141上のスポットの位置は、回折格子112と透過部材141との相対的な回転角に応じて、変化する。 Returning to the description of FIG. 13, the transmission member 141 is rotatable as described in the first embodiment. The drive control unit 160 a can control the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112 and the drive unit of the transmission member 141. The transmitting member 141 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1, and the spot position D1 of the + 1st order diffracted light and the position D2 of the spot of the −1st order diffracted light shown in FIG. Correspond. That is, the position of the spot on the transmission member 141 changes according to the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141.

 図5などに示したように、透過部材141は、第2領域122および第1領域121を有している。駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112と透過部材141との相対的な回転角を制御することにより、透過部材141において回折光のスポット光が形成される領域を、第2領域122と第1領域121とで切り替え可能である。例えば、駆動制御部160aは、+1次回折光のスポット光および-1次回折光のスポット光がいずれも第1領域121に配置されるように、回折格子112と透過部材141との相対的な回転角を制御できる。また、駆動制御部160aは、+1次回折光のスポット光が第2領域122に形成され、かつ-1次回折光のスポット光が第1領域121に形成されるように、回折格子112と透過部材141との相対的な回転角を制御できる。透過部材141の厚み方向における光学的距離が第2領域122と第2領域とで異なることから、駆動制御部160aは、透過部材141を通過した+1次回折光と-1次回折光の位相差を制御できる。この駆動制御部160aが+1次回折光と-1次回折光の位相差を制御する具体例について、図16を参照して説明する。 As shown in FIG. 5 and the like, the transmission member 141 has a second region 122 and a first region 121. The drive control unit 160a controls the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141, so that the region where the spot light of the diffracted light is formed in the transmissive member 141 is the second region 122 and the first region. 121 can be switched. For example, the drive control unit 160a may set the relative rotation angle between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that both the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light and the spot light of the −1st order diffracted light are arranged in the first region 121. Can be controlled. Further, the drive control unit 160a includes the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light is formed in the second region 122 and the spot light of the −1st order diffracted light is formed in the first region 121. Relative rotation angle can be controlled. Since the optical distance in the thickness direction of the transmission member 141 differs between the second region 122 and the second region, the drive control unit 160a controls the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light that have passed through the transmission member 141. it can. A specific example in which the drive control unit 160a controls the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light will be described with reference to FIG.

 図16は、本実施形態の光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。駆動制御部160aは、図16(a)に示す位置(例えば、回転角0°および回転角180°の位置)に回折光が入射するように、回折格子112を回転駆動する。これにより、回折格子112から射出された2つの光線束の回折光のうち、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1が第2領域122を透過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-1’になる。また、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2が第1領域121を透過する。このようにして位相付与部120は、同位相の回折光L1-1と、回折光L1-2とに位相差を付与する。 FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a positional relationship between the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 of the present embodiment. The drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the diffraction grating 112 so that the diffracted light is incident on the positions shown in FIG. 16A (for example, the positions having a rotation angle of 0 ° and a rotation angle of 180 °). As a result, of the two diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 112, the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 ° is transmitted through the second region 122 and the phase thereof is modulated. The modulated diffracted light L1-1 ′ is obtained. Further, the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° is transmitted through the first region 121. In this way, the phase imparting unit 120 imparts a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase.

 次に、図16(b)を参照して、駆動制御部160aが回折格子112の回転角を変化させずに、透過部材141を光線束の進行方向に対して左回りに回転角90°だけ回転駆動した場合について説明する。駆動制御部160aは、図16(b)に示す位置(回転角90°の位置)に透過部材141の第2領域122が配置されるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、2つの回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を透過する。したがって、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2の位相は、透過部材141の透過後においても同位相になる。これは、図16(a)に示した場合、すなわち透過部材141の透過後において、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2に位相差がある場合と、位相差の有無の点で相違する。 Next, referring to FIG. 16 (b), the drive control unit 160a does not change the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112, and rotates the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle by 90 °. A case of rotational driving will be described. The drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG. As a result, the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 are both transmitted through the first region 121. Therefore, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after transmission through the transmission member 141. This is different from the case shown in FIG. 16A, that is, the case where there is a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 after being transmitted through the transmitting member 141, in terms of the presence or absence of the phase difference. To do.

 次に、図16(c)を参照して、駆動制御部160aが透過部材141を光線束の進行方向に対して左回りに、図16(b)に示す場合に対してさらに回転角90°だけ回転駆動した場合について説明する。駆動制御部160aは、図16(c)に示す位置(回転角180°の位置)に透過部材141の第2領域122が配置されるように、透過部材141を回転駆動する。これにより、回折光L1-2が第2領域122を透過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-2’になる。また、回折光L1-1が第1領域121を透過する。このようにして位相付与部120は、互いに同位相の回折光L1-1と、回折光L1-2とに位相差を付与する。これは、図16(a)に示した場合、すなわち透過部材141を透過した回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2とは、2つの回折光の位相差について、進相と遅相との関係が逆になる点で相違する。 Next, referring to FIG. 16C, the drive control unit 160a turns the transmission member 141 counterclockwise with respect to the traveling direction of the light bundle, and further rotates by 90 ° with respect to the case shown in FIG. The case where only rotational driving is performed will be described. The drive control unit 160a rotationally drives the transmissive member 141 so that the second region 122 of the transmissive member 141 is disposed at the position illustrated in FIG. As a result, the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated, and becomes a diffracted light L1-2 'after phase modulation. Further, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first region 121. In this way, the phase applying unit 120 provides a phase difference between the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase. This is because the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 transmitted through the transmitting member 141 are the phase difference between the diffracted light and the phase-advanced phase as shown in FIG. It is different in that the relationship is reversed.

 ここまで図16(a)~(c)を参照して、駆動制御部160aが干渉縞の位相差を制御する仕組みの一例を説明した。次に、図17を参照して、駆動制御部160aが干渉縞の方向を制御する仕組みの一例について説明する。 Up to this point, an example of a mechanism in which the drive control unit 160a controls the phase difference of the interference fringes has been described with reference to FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (c). Next, an example of a mechanism by which the drive control unit 160a controls the direction of the interference fringes will be described with reference to FIG.

 図17は、本実施形態の駆動制御部160aが制御する干渉縞の方向の一例を示す模式図である。駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを同期させて回転駆動することにより、干渉縞の方向を制御する。具体的には、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを同期させて、光線束の進行方向に対して左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動する。このとき、回折格子112から射出される各回折光が透過部材141に入射する位置は、回折格子112の回転に伴って変化する。このため、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動されてその回転角が0°から120°に変化すると、透過部材141から射出される回折光の位置が、左回りに120°変位する(図17(b)を参照。)。これにより、対物レンズ154に入射する回折光の位置が、左回りに120°変位するため、干渉縞の方向が左回りに120°変位する。 FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the direction of interference fringes controlled by the drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment. The drive control unit 160a controls the direction of the interference fringes by rotating and driving the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 in synchronization. Specifically, the drive controller 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the traveling direction of the light beam. At this time, the position at which each diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 112 enters the transmission member 141 changes as the diffraction grating 112 rotates. For this reason, when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are rotated counterclockwise and the rotation angle changes from 0 ° to 120 °, the position of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is counterclockwise. (See FIG. 17B). As a result, the position of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is displaced 120 ° counterclockwise, so that the direction of the interference fringes is displaced 120 ° counterclockwise.

 さらに、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが左回りに、それぞれ回転駆動されてその回転角が120°から240°に変化すると、透過部材141から射出される回折光の位置が、さらに左回りに120°変位する(図17(c)を参照。)。これにより、対物レンズ154に入射する回折光の位置が、左回りにさらに120°変位するため、干渉縞の方向が左回りにさらに120°変位する。このようにして、駆動制御部160aは、干渉縞の方向を制御する。 Further, when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are driven to rotate counterclockwise and the rotation angle changes from 120 ° to 240 °, the position of the diffracted light emitted from the transmission member 141 is further counterclockwise. (See FIG. 17C). As a result, the position of the diffracted light incident on the objective lens 154 is further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise, so that the direction of the interference fringes is further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise. In this way, the drive control unit 160a controls the direction of the interference fringes.

 [干渉縞の方向と位相との同期制御]
 駆動制御部160aは、上述した回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動することにより、干渉縞の方向と位相とを変更する。ここで、回折格子112を停止させずに連続的に回転駆動すると、回折格子112から射出される回折光が所望の方向以外の方向に生ずる期間が発生する。照明装置10aは、回折格子112から射出される回折光が所望の方向以外の方向に生ずる期間において、リレーレンズ152からの光が照明領域LAに入射しないように光を遮る、絞り部材155を備えている。
[Synchronous control of interference fringe direction and phase]
The drive controller 160a changes the direction and phase of the interference fringes by continuously rotating the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 described above without stopping them. Here, when the diffraction grating 112 is continuously rotated without being stopped, a period in which diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 112 is generated in a direction other than a desired direction is generated. The illumination device 10a includes a diaphragm member 155 that blocks light so that light from the relay lens 152 does not enter the illumination area LA during a period in which diffracted light emitted from the diffraction grating 112 is generated in a direction other than a desired direction. ing.

 本実施形態において、絞り部材155は、リレーレンズ152からの光が通過する領域の形状と寸法の一方または双方を可変である。駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、リレーレンズ152からの光を任意のタイミングで遮ることができる。 In the present embodiment, the diaphragm member 155 can change one or both of the shape and size of the region through which the light from the relay lens 152 passes. The drive controller 160a can block the light from the relay lens 152 at an arbitrary timing by controlling the diaphragm member 155.

 例えば、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112が所望以外の回転角に配置されるタイミングで、リレーレンズ152からの光が照明領域LAに入射しないように、この光を絞り部材155により遮ることができる。これにより、駆動制御部160aは、所望以外の回折方向の回折光を照明領域LAに入射しないように遮ることができる。このように、絞り部材155は、駆動制御部160aによる干渉縞の変更中に、回折格子112が生成する光線束のうち、少なくとも一部の光線束を遮光できる。 For example, the drive controller 160a may block the light from the relay lens 152 by the diaphragm member 155 so that the light from the relay lens 152 does not enter the illumination area LA at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 is arranged at a rotation angle other than desired. it can. Accordingly, the drive control unit 160a can block diffracted light in a diffraction direction other than desired so as not to enter the illumination area LA. As described above, the diaphragm member 155 can block at least a part of the light bundles generated by the diffraction grating 112 during the change of the interference fringes by the drive control unit 160a.

 また、駆動制御部160aは、透過部材141上の回折光の集光により形成されたスポット光が第2領域122と第1領域121にまたがって配置されるタイミングで、リレーレンズ152からの光が照明領域LAに入射しないように、この光を絞り部材155により遮ることができる。すなわち、絞り部材155は、駆動制御部160aによる位相差との変更中に、回折格子112が生成する光線束のうち、少なくとも一部の光線束を遮光できる。 In addition, the drive control unit 160a receives the light from the relay lens 152 at the timing when the spot light formed by condensing the diffracted light on the transmission member 141 is arranged across the second region 122 and the first region 121. This light can be blocked by the diaphragm member 155 so as not to enter the illumination area LA. That is, the diaphragm member 155 can block at least a part of the light bundles generated by the diffraction grating 112 during the change from the phase difference by the drive control unit 160a.

 すなわち、照明光学系150は、駆動制御部160aによる干渉縞の方向と位相との変更中に、光線束生成部110が生成する光線束のうち、少なくとも一部の光線束を遮光する遮光部を備えている。 That is, the illumination optical system 150 includes a light shielding unit that shields at least a part of the light bundles generated by the light bundle generation unit 110 during the change of the direction and phase of the interference fringes by the drive control unit 160a. I have.

 駆動制御部160aは、撮像部210の露光動作にあわせた所定のタイミングで絞り部材155を制御して、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動することにより、干渉縞の方向と位相とを変更する。ここでは、まず、互いに位相差のある回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。次に、同位相の回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。次に、互いに位相差のある回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。これにより、駆動制御部160aは、干渉縞の方向と、回折光の位相差との組み合わせを、9通りに変化させる。 The drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 at a predetermined timing according to the exposure operation of the imaging unit 210, and continuously rotates and drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping. As a result, the direction and phase of the interference fringes are changed. Here, first, a case will be described in which the direction of the interference fringes is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 'and the diffracted light L1-2 that have a phase difference. Next, the case where the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase will be described. Next, the case where the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 'having a phase difference will be described. Accordingly, the drive control unit 160a changes the combinations of the interference fringe direction and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways.

 まず、互いに位相差のある回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。駆動制御部160aは、図17(a)に示す位置(例えば、回転角0°および回転角180°の位置)に回折光が入射するように、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを回転駆動する。これにより、回折格子112から射出された2つの光線束の回折光のうち、回転角0°の位置に入射する回折光L1-1が第2領域122を透過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-1’になる。また、回転角180°の位置に入射する回折光L1-2が第1領域121を透過する。このとき駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが左回りに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが、左回りにさらに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 このようにして、駆動制御部160aは、互いに位相差のある回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2が照明領域LAに入射する位置を3通りに変化させる。
First, the case where the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 having a phase difference will be described. The drive controller 160a rotationally drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so that the diffracted light is incident on the positions shown in FIG. 17A (for example, the positions of the rotation angle 0 ° and the rotation angle 180 °). To do. As a result, of the two diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 112, the diffracted light L1-1 incident on the rotation angle of 0 ° is transmitted through the second region 122 and the phase thereof is modulated. The modulated diffracted light L1-1 ′ is obtained. Further, the diffracted light L1-2 incident on the rotation angle of 180 ° is transmitted through the first region 121. At this time, the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 to enter the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously. The drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1- at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are displaced counterclockwise by 120 ° by this rotational drive. 2 enters the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously. By this rotational drive, at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light. L1-2 is made incident on the illumination area LA.
In this way, the drive control unit 160a changes the positions where the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2 having a phase difference from each other enter the illumination area LA in three ways.

 次に、同位相の回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1’および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。このとき、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の回転速度よりも、透過部材141の回転速度を速くして、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112を左回りに120°変位する間に、透過部材141を左回りに210°変位するようにして、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを回転駆動する。これにより、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが、上述した図16(b)に示す状態になる。すなわち、透過部材141に入射する2つの回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2が、いずれも第1領域121を透過する。したがって、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2の位相は、透過部材141の透過後においても同位相になる。このとき駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。このとき、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の回転速度と、透過部材141の回転速度とを一致させて回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが左回りにさらに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが、左回りにさらに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 このようにして、駆動制御部160aは、同位相の回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2が照明領域LAに入射する位置を3通りに変化させる。
Next, the case where the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase will be described. The drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to block the diffracted light L1-1 ′ and the diffracted light L1-2, and continuously stops the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping them. Rotational drive. At this time, the drive control unit 160a increases the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 faster than the rotation speed of the diffraction grating 112, and continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping both. To drive. Specifically, the drive control unit 160a displaces the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so as to displace the transmission member 141 by 210 degrees counterclockwise while the diffraction grating 112 is displaced 120 degrees counterclockwise. Rotation drive. Thereby, the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are in the state shown in FIG. That is, the two diffracted lights L1-1 and L1-2 incident on the transmissive member 141 are both transmitted through the first region 121. Therefore, the phases of the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 are the same even after transmission through the transmission member 141. At this time, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 to enter the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops neither the diffraction grating 112 nor the transmissive member 141. To continuously rotate. At this time, the drive control unit 160a rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 at the same rotational speed. At the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are further displaced counterclockwise by 120 ° due to this rotational drive, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1- 2 enters the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and further stops neither the diffraction grating 112 nor the transmissive member 141. To continuously rotate. By this rotational drive, at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1. -2 is incident on the illumination area LA.
In this way, the drive control unit 160a changes the positions at which the diffracted light L1-1 and diffracted light L1-2 having the same phase are incident on the illumination area LA in three ways.

 次に、互いに位相差のある回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’について、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる場合について説明する。駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。このとき、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の回転速度よりも、透過部材141の回転速度を速くして、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。具体的には、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112を左回りに120°変位する間に、透過部材141を左回りに210°変位するようにして、回折格子112と、透過部材141とを回転駆動する。これにより、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが、上述した図16(c)に示す状態になる。すなわち、回折光L1-2が第2領域122を透過してその位相が変調され、位相変調後の回折光L1-2’になる。また、回折光L1-1が第1領域121を透過する。このとき駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。このとき、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の回転速度と、透過部材141の回転速度とを一致させて回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが左回りにさらに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 次に、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’を遮光するとともに、さらに回折格子112と、透過部材141とを、いずれも停止させずに連続的に回転駆動する。この回転駆動により、回折格子112と、透過部材141とが、左回りにさらに120°変位したタイミングにおいて、駆動制御部160aは、絞り部材155を制御して、回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’を照明領域LAに入射させる。
 このようにして、駆動制御部160aは、互いに位相差がある回折光L1-1および回折光L1-2’が照明領域LAに入射する位置を3通りに変化させる。
Next, the case where the direction of the interference fringe is changed in three ways for the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′ having a phase difference from each other will be described. The drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2, and continuously stops the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 without stopping them. To rotate. At this time, the drive control unit 160a increases the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 faster than the rotation speed of the diffraction grating 112, and continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without stopping both. To drive. Specifically, the drive control unit 160a displaces the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 so as to displace the transmission member 141 by 210 degrees counterclockwise while the diffraction grating 112 is displaced 120 degrees counterclockwise. Rotation drive. Thereby, the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141 are in the state shown in FIG. That is, the diffracted light L1-2 passes through the second region 122 and its phase is modulated to become a diffracted light L1-2 ′ after phase modulation. Further, the diffracted light L1-1 passes through the first region 121. At this time, the drive controller 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to cause the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′ to enter the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously. At this time, the drive control unit 160a rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 at the same rotational speed. At the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are further displaced counterclockwise by 120 ° due to this rotational drive, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1- 2 'is made incident on the illumination area LA.
Next, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to shield the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′, and further stops both the diffraction grating 112 and the transmissive member 141. Without rotating continuously. By this rotational drive, at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are further displaced by 120 ° counterclockwise, the drive control unit 160a controls the diaphragm member 155 to control the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1. -2 ′ is incident on the illumination area LA.
In this way, the drive control unit 160a changes the positions where the diffracted light L1-1 and the diffracted light L1-2 ′ having a phase difference from each other enter the illumination area LA in three ways.

 そして、演算部220は、方向、及び位相差の異なる9種類の干渉縞を投影した標本SPの9枚の画像を生成し、周知の方法で生成した9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成する。なお、駆動制御部160aによる回折格子112、及び透過部材141の回転駆動は、撮像部210が9種類全ての標本SPの像を撮像するまで停止することなく継続される。また、9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成するまでの時間が短ければ、駆動制御部160aによる回折格子112、及び透過部材141の回転駆動は、演算部220が9枚の画像から超解像画像を生成するまで継続されることと言い換えることもできる。 Then, the calculation unit 220 generates nine images of the specimen SP on which nine types of interference fringes having different directions and phase differences are projected, and generates a super-resolution image from the nine images generated by a known method. To do. The rotation drive of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160a is continued without stopping until the imaging unit 210 captures all nine types of specimen SP images. In addition, if the time until generation of a super-resolution image from nine images is short, the rotational drive of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 by the drive control unit 160a is performed by the calculation unit 220 from the nine images. In other words, it can be continued until an image is generated.

 以上説明したように、本実施形態の観察装置1aは、光線束生成部110及び位相付与部120をそれぞれ駆動して、干渉縞の方向と位相とを制御する駆動制御部160aを備えている。この観察装置1aの光線束生成部110は、1方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を1方向に分布する第1光線束及び第2光線束を含む複数の光線束に分割する回折格子112を備えている。また、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112(光線束分割部)及び位相付与部120を駆動して、第1光線束または第2光線束の少なくとも一方を位相付与部120に入射させ、かつ、入射させる位相付与部120上の位置を変化させることにより、位相差が所定の位相差の際に干渉縞の方向を変化させる。この駆動制御部160aを備えることにより、観察装置1aは、観察装置1と同様の効果を奏する。 As described above, the observation apparatus 1a of the present embodiment includes the drive control unit 160a that drives the light beam generation unit 110 and the phase providing unit 120 to control the direction and phase of interference fringes. The light beam generation unit 110 of the observation apparatus 1a has a periodic structure in one direction, and diffracts the incident light beam into a plurality of light beams including a first light beam and a second light beam distributed in one direction. A grid 112 is provided. Further, the drive control unit 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 (light bundle splitting unit) and the phase applying unit 120 to cause at least one of the first light bundle or the second light bundle to enter the phase providing unit 120, and By changing the position on the phase applying unit 120 to be incident, the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference. By providing this drive control unit 160a, the observation apparatus 1a has the same effect as the observation apparatus 1.

 また、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112の回転を停止させずに干渉縞の方向を変化させる。ここで、従来のように、不図示の駆動部が回転している回折格子112を停止させる場合や停止している回折格子112を加速させる場合には、特に回転が停止する直前や直後において、例えばバックラッシュなどによって不図示の駆動部が振動することで、駆動部の振動が回折格子112に伝わり、回折格子112が振動する。この時、回折格子112において、特に、回折格子112の回転方向に沿った振動成分や、光源101からの光線束が入射する回折格子112の入射面に平行な方向の振動成分によって、標本SP上に形成される干渉縞のコントラスト(S/N比)が低下するため、超解像画像の解像度が低下する。したがって、十分なコントラストの干渉縞が標本SP上に形成された像を撮像するためには、不図示の駆動部の振動が安定するまで撮像部210による撮像動作を待つ必要があり、この場合には、撮像に要する時間が長くなるという問題が生じる。
 この観察装置1aが備える駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112および透過部材141の回転を停止することなく回折光の方向を切換えることができるため、回折格子112に振動が発生する程度を低減することができる。したがって、この観察装置1aによれば、超解像画像の解像度を所望の解像度に維持しつつ、回折格子112の振動が安定するまでの待機時間をなくし、超解像画像を生成するための時間を短縮することができる。
 また、上述したように回折格子112および透過部材141は、停止することなく連続回転する。したがって、この観察装置1aによれば、回折格子112および透過部材141を停止させて断続的に回転させる場合に生じる、停止または加速のための時間が生じないこれにより、観察装置1aは、超解像画像を生成するための時間を短縮することができる。
In addition, the drive control unit 160a changes the direction of the interference fringes without stopping the rotation of the diffraction grating 112. Here, as in the conventional case, when stopping the rotating diffraction grating 112 or accelerating the stopped diffraction grating 112, a driving unit (not shown) particularly immediately before or after the rotation stops, For example, when a driving unit (not shown) vibrates due to backlash or the like, the vibration of the driving unit is transmitted to the diffraction grating 112, and the diffraction grating 112 vibrates. At this time, in the diffraction grating 112, particularly on the sample SP due to a vibration component along the rotation direction of the diffraction grating 112 or a vibration component in a direction parallel to the incident surface of the diffraction grating 112 on which the light beam from the light source 101 is incident. Since the contrast (S / N ratio) of the interference fringes formed in the image quality decreases, the resolution of the super-resolution image decreases. Therefore, in order to capture an image in which interference fringes with sufficient contrast are formed on the specimen SP, it is necessary to wait for an imaging operation by the imaging unit 210 until vibration of a driving unit (not shown) is stabilized. Causes a problem that the time required for imaging becomes long.
The drive control unit 160a included in the observation apparatus 1a can switch the direction of the diffracted light without stopping the rotation of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141, so that the degree of vibration generated in the diffraction grating 112 can be reduced. Can do. Therefore, according to the observation apparatus 1a, the time for generating the super-resolution image by eliminating the waiting time until the vibration of the diffraction grating 112 is stabilized while maintaining the resolution of the super-resolution image at a desired resolution. Can be shortened.
Further, as described above, the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are continuously rotated without stopping. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, there is no time for stopping or accelerating, which occurs when the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 are stopped and rotated intermittently. The time for generating an image can be shortened.

 また、駆動制御部160aは、透過部材141の回転速度を可変にして、回折格子112および透過部材141をそれぞれ回転駆動する。上述したように、駆動制御部160aは、±1次回折光による干渉縞の方向を、3方向に変化させつつ、各方向の干渉縞について、±1次回折光の位相差を進相・同相・遅相の3種類に変化させる。すなわち、駆動制御部160aは、干渉縞の方向と、回折光の位相差との組み合わせを、9通りに変化させる。ここで、透過部材141の回転速度を可変にしない場合、干渉縞の方向および回折光の位相差を、この9通りに変化させるためには、回折格子112および透過部材141とのうち、少なくとも一方の回転が停止する期間が生じる。この場合、回折格子112を停止させれば、振動により超解像画像の解像度が低下するため、振動が安定するまで撮像動作を待つことがあり、この場合には、撮像時間が長くなるという問題が生じる。一方、透過部材141を停止させれば、停止及び加速のための時間がかかる。本実施形態の駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112および透過部材141を停止させることなく、速度を可変にして回転駆動しながら、回折光の位相差と、回折光による干渉縞の方向とを変化させることができる。したがって、この観察装置1aによれば、超解像画像を生成するための時間を短縮することができる。
 なお、この一例においては、透過部材141の回転速度のみを可変にする場合について説明したが、駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112および透過部材141との少なくとも一方の回転速度を可変にすれば、上述の効果を奏することができる。
Further, the drive control unit 160a drives the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 to rotate by changing the rotation speed of the transmission member 141. As described above, the drive control unit 160a changes the phase difference of the ± 1st order diffracted light with respect to the interference fringes in each direction while changing the direction of the interference fringe due to the ± 1st order diffracted light in three directions. Change to 3 types of phases. That is, the drive control unit 160a changes the combinations of the interference fringe direction and the phase difference of the diffracted light in nine ways. Here, when the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is not variable, in order to change the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference of the diffracted light in these nine ways, at least one of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 is used. There is a period during which the rotation of the motor stops. In this case, if the diffraction grating 112 is stopped, the resolution of the super-resolution image is lowered due to the vibration, so that the imaging operation may be waited until the vibration is stabilized. In this case, the imaging time becomes long. Occurs. On the other hand, if the transmitting member 141 is stopped, it takes time to stop and accelerate. The drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment changes the phase difference of the diffracted light and the direction of the interference fringes due to the diffracted light while rotating and rotating the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 without changing the speed. Can be made. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, it is possible to shorten the time for generating the super-resolution image.
In this example, the case where only the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 is made variable has been described. However, if the drive control unit 160a makes the rotation speed of at least one of the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 variable, The effects described above can be achieved.

 また、生細胞を観察するいわゆる、ライブセルイメージングにおいて、従来は、超解像画像の生成までに長時間かかっていたため、超解像画像を生成するまでに生細胞が動くと、所望の解像度の超解像画像を得ることができなかった。一方、観察装置1aでは、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができるため、動きが早く今まで所望の解像度を得ることができなかった生細胞であっても、その超解像画像を所望の解像度で生成することができるようになる。 Also, in so-called live cell imaging for observing live cells, conventionally, it took a long time to generate a super-resolution image, so if the live cells move before generating a super-resolution image, the desired resolution is achieved. A super-resolution image could not be obtained. On the other hand, since the observation apparatus 1a can shorten the time required to generate a super-resolution image, even a living cell that has been fast moving and has not been able to obtain a desired resolution until now has its super-resolution. An image can be generated at a desired resolution.

 なお、本実施形態において、駆動制御部160aは、超解像画像を生成するために必要な標本SPの像を撮像し終えるまで回折格子112、及び透過部材141を連続的に回転駆動させるが、回折格子112のみを連続的に回転させるだけで、透過部材141は断続的に回転させるようにしてもよい。この場合、駆動制御部160aは、標本SP上に形成される干渉縞の方向を変化させる際、及び干渉縞の位相差(+1次回折光と-1次回折光との位相差)を変化させる際の少なくともどちらか一方において透過部材141を一時的に停止するように制御してもよい。このようにしても、上述と同様に不図示の駆動部の振動(回折格子112の振動)が安定するまで撮像部210による撮像動作を待つ必要がなくなるため、所望の解像度の超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができる。 In the present embodiment, the drive control unit 160a continuously rotates the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141 until the image of the specimen SP necessary for generating a super-resolution image is captured. The transmission member 141 may be intermittently rotated only by continuously rotating only the diffraction grating 112. In this case, the drive controller 160a changes the direction of the interference fringes formed on the sample SP and changes the phase difference of the interference fringes (the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light). At least one of them may be controlled so as to temporarily stop the transmissive member 141. Even in this case, it is not necessary to wait for the imaging operation by the imaging unit 210 until the vibration of the driving unit (not shown) (vibration of the diffraction grating 112) is stabilized as described above, so that a super-resolution image with a desired resolution can be obtained. The time until generation can be shortened.

 [変形例]
 次に、照明装置10aの変形例について説明する。図18は、本変形例における照明装置10aを示す図である。この照明装置10aは、光源装置100の導光部材102とコリメータ103との間に配置された遮光部材158を備える。遮光部材158は、図13を参照して説明した絞り部材155と同様に、光が通過する領域の形状と寸法の一方または双方が可変である。
[Modification]
Next, a modified example of the lighting device 10a will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an illumination device 10a according to this modification. The illumination device 10 a includes a light shielding member 158 arranged between the light guide member 102 and the collimator 103 of the light source device 100. As with the diaphragm member 155 described with reference to FIG. 13, the light shielding member 158 is variable in one or both of the shape and size of the region through which light passes.

 駆動制御部160aは、図13の絞り部材155と同様に遮光部材158を制御できる。駆動制御部160aは、回折格子112が所望以外の回転角に配置されるタイミングで、光源101からの光が照明領域LAに入射しないように、この光を遮光部材158により遮ることができる。すなわち、遮光部材158は、所望以外の回折方向の回折光が照明領域LAに入射することを抑制できる。また、駆動制御部160aは、透過部材141上の回折光のスポット光が第2領域122と第1領域121にまたがって配置されるタイミングで、光源101からの光が照明領域LAに入射しないように、この光を遮光部材158により遮ることができる。すなわち、遮光部材158は、所望以外の位相差の回折光が照明領域LAに入射することを抑制できる。 The drive control unit 160a can control the light shielding member 158 similarly to the diaphragm member 155 of FIG. The drive controller 160a can block the light from the light source 101 by the light blocking member 158 so that the light from the light source 101 does not enter the illumination area LA at the timing when the diffraction grating 112 is arranged at a rotation angle other than desired. That is, the light shielding member 158 can suppress the diffracted light having a diffraction direction other than the desired light from entering the illumination area LA. In addition, the drive control unit 160a prevents the light from the light source 101 from entering the illumination area LA at the timing when the spot light of the diffracted light on the transmission member 141 is arranged across the second area 122 and the first area 121. In addition, this light can be blocked by the light blocking member 158. That is, the light shielding member 158 can suppress the diffracted light having a phase difference other than that desired from being incident on the illumination area LA.

 図18のように、光源101からの光のスポット光のサイズが、例えば共役面OS2におけるスポット光のサイズよりも小さくなる位置に遮光部材158が配置されていると、遮光部材158を小型にできる。なお、遮光部材158は、光源101と、撮像部210の受光面との間の光路において、いずれの位置に配置されていてもよい。例えば、駆動制御部160aは、回折光の位相差と回折方向の一方または双方が所望以外の状態であるタイミングで照明されている標本SPからの光を撮像部210が検出しないように、撮像部210のシャッターなどを制御してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 18, when the light shielding member 158 is arranged at a position where the size of the spot light of the light from the light source 101 is smaller than the size of the spot light on the conjugate plane OS2, for example, the light shielding member 158 can be reduced in size. . The light shielding member 158 may be disposed at any position in the optical path between the light source 101 and the light receiving surface of the imaging unit 210. For example, the drive control unit 160a may prevent the imaging unit 210 from detecting light from the specimen SP that is illuminated at a timing when one or both of the phase difference and the diffraction direction of the diffracted light are in a state other than desired. The shutter 210 may be controlled.

 図19は、光線束生成部110の変形例を示す図である。この光線束生成部110は、ベース部材114と、ベース部材114に取り付けられた複数の回折格子112とを備える。ベース部材114は、回転軸AX6の周りで回転可能である。複数の回折格子113は、回転軸AX6を囲むように配置されている。複数の回折格子113は、それぞれ、ベース部材114の回転軸AX6の方向から見た形状が円状である。この回転軸AX6は、光軸AX1とは、非同軸に配置される。 FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the light beam generation unit 110. The beam bundle generator 110 includes a base member 114 and a plurality of diffraction gratings 112 attached to the base member 114. The base member 114 is rotatable around the rotation axis AX6. The plurality of diffraction gratings 113 are arranged so as to surround the rotation axis AX6. Each of the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 has a circular shape when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114. The rotation axis AX6 is arranged non-coaxially with the optical axis AX1.

 複数の回折格子113は、第1回折格子113a、第2回折格子113b、及び第3回折格子113cを含む。第1回折格子113a、第2回折格子113b、及び第3回折格子113cは、回転軸AX6の周り周方向において約120°のピッチで配置されている。第1回折格子113aの回折方向と、第2回折格子113bの回折方向と、第3回折格子113cの回折方向は、回転軸AX6と直交する面上で互いに異なる方向に設定されている。ここでは、第1回折格子113aの回折方向は、第2回折格子113bの回折方向と約120°の角度をなしている。また、第3回折格子113cの回折方向は、第2回折格子113bの回折方向に対する第1回折格子113aの回折方向の向きとは反対向きに、第2回折格子113bと約120°の角度をなしている。 The plurality of diffraction gratings 113 include a first diffraction grating 113a, a second diffraction grating 113b, and a third diffraction grating 113c. The first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b, and the third diffraction grating 113c are arranged at a pitch of about 120 ° in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX6. The diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a, the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b, and the diffraction direction of the third diffraction grating 113c are set to different directions on the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis AX6. Here, the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a forms an angle of about 120 ° with the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b. Further, the diffraction direction of the third diffraction grating 113c forms an angle of about 120 ° with the second diffraction grating 113b in the direction opposite to the direction of the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a with respect to the diffraction direction of the second diffraction grating 113b. ing.

 第1回折格子113aは、ベース部材114の回転軸AX6の方向から見た第1回折格子113aの中心の周りに、ベース部材114上で回転可能である。第2回折格子113bおよび第3回折格子113cは、第1回折格子113aと同様に、ベース部材114上で自転可能である。 The first diffraction grating 113a is rotatable on the base member 114 around the center of the first diffraction grating 113a viewed from the direction of the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114. Similarly to the first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b and the third diffraction grating 113c can rotate on the base member 114.

 図19において、第1回折格子113a、第2回折格子113b、及び第3回折格子113cは、いずれも、1つのギア115に接続されている。第1回折格子113a、第2回折格子113b、及び第3回折格子113cは、ギア115の回転に伴って、互いに連動して自転する。ギア115は、ベース部材114と並行して回転する。
 ここで、図19に示す露光領域PEとは、コリメータ103から出射した光が透過する領域である。この露光領域PEの位置は、ベース部材114が回転しても変化しない。したがって、ベース部材114の回転に伴って第1回折格子113a、第2回折格子113b、及び第3回折格子113cが回転軸AX6の周りを回転すると、各回折格子は、順次この露光領域PEを通過する。
In FIG. 19, the first diffraction grating 113 a, the second diffraction grating 113 b, and the third diffraction grating 113 c are all connected to one gear 115. The first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b, and the third diffraction grating 113c rotate in conjunction with each other as the gear 115 rotates. The gear 115 rotates in parallel with the base member 114.
Here, the exposure area PE shown in FIG. 19 is an area through which light emitted from the collimator 103 is transmitted. The position of the exposure region PE does not change even when the base member 114 rotates. Accordingly, when the first diffraction grating 113a, the second diffraction grating 113b, and the third diffraction grating 113c rotate around the rotation axis AX6 as the base member 114 rotates, each diffraction grating sequentially passes through the exposure region PE. To do.

 ここで、ギア115が回転しない場合を想定する。この場合に、第1回折格子113aは、ベース部材114の回転に伴って回転軸AX6の周りを回転し、回折方向が変化する。ギア115の回転速度は、ベース部材114の回転軸AX6の周りで回転することによる第1回折格子113aの回折方向の変化を打ち消すように、ベース部材114の回転速度に応じて設定されている。よって、第1回折格子113aは、ベース部材114およびギア115が回転した場合であっても、回折方向が変化しない。また、第2回折格子113b及び第3回折格子113cは、第1回折格子113aと同様に、ベース部材114およびギア115が回転した場合であっても、回折方向が変化しない。
 上述したように、1方向に周期構造を有する回折格子112を連続的に回転させると、回折格子112の回転に応じて回折方向が変化する。このため、回折格子112を連続的に回転させる場合に、撮像部210の露光時間を長くすると、標本SP上に形成される干渉縞のコントラストが低下して超解像画像の解像度が低下する可能性がある。一方、この変形例による複数の回折格子113によれば、回折格子113を連続的に回転させても、各回折格子113が露光領域PEを通過する間、回折方向を一定の方向に維持することができる。したがって、この変形例による複数の回折格子113によれば、撮像部210の露光時間を長くしても所望の解像度の超解像画像を得ることができる。
 また、本実施形態の駆動制御部160aは、回折格子113を停止させることなく、回転駆動する。したがって、この観察装置1aによれば、回折格子113の振動が安定するまでの待機時間をなくすことができるため、超解像画像を生成するための時間を短縮することができる。
Here, it is assumed that the gear 115 does not rotate. In this case, the first diffraction grating 113a rotates around the rotation axis AX6 as the base member 114 rotates, and the diffraction direction changes. The rotation speed of the gear 115 is set according to the rotation speed of the base member 114 so as to cancel the change in the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a due to the rotation around the rotation axis AX6 of the base member 114. Therefore, the diffraction direction of the first diffraction grating 113a does not change even when the base member 114 and the gear 115 rotate. Further, as in the first diffraction grating 113a, the diffraction directions of the second diffraction grating 113b and the third diffraction grating 113c do not change even when the base member 114 and the gear 115 rotate.
As described above, when the diffraction grating 112 having a periodic structure in one direction is continuously rotated, the diffraction direction changes according to the rotation of the diffraction grating 112. For this reason, when the diffraction grating 112 is continuously rotated, if the exposure time of the imaging unit 210 is increased, the contrast of the interference fringes formed on the specimen SP may be reduced, and the resolution of the super-resolution image may be reduced. There is sex. On the other hand, according to the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 according to this modification, even if the diffraction gratings 113 are continuously rotated, the diffraction direction is maintained in a constant direction while each diffraction grating 113 passes through the exposure region PE. Can do. Therefore, according to the plurality of diffraction gratings 113 according to this modification, a super-resolution image with a desired resolution can be obtained even if the exposure time of the imaging unit 210 is increased.
In addition, the drive control unit 160a of the present embodiment rotationally drives the diffraction grating 113 without stopping it. Therefore, according to this observation apparatus 1a, the standby time until the vibration of the diffraction grating 113 is stabilized can be eliminated, so that the time for generating a super-resolution image can be shortened.

 次に、位相付与部120の変形例について説明する。図20(a)から図20(c)は、それぞれ、位相付与部120の変形例を示す図である。 Next, a modified example of the phase applying unit 120 will be described. 20 (a) to 20 (c) are diagrams showing modifications of the phase applying unit 120, respectively.

 図20(a)に示す位相付与部120は、光が透過する特性の部材が第2領域122に配置されており、第1領域121が真空領域又はガス領域になっている。このように、第2領域122と第1領域121の一方には、部材が配置されていなくてもよく、例えば第2領域122が真空領域又はガス領域であって、第1領域121に光が透過する特性の部材が配置されていてもよい。なお、第1領域121は、水、油などの液体の領域となっていてもよい。 In the phase imparting unit 120 shown in FIG. 20A, a member having a property of transmitting light is disposed in the second region 122, and the first region 121 is a vacuum region or a gas region. Thus, no member may be disposed in one of the second region 122 and the first region 121. For example, the second region 122 is a vacuum region or a gas region, and light is transmitted to the first region 121. A member having the property of transmitting may be arranged. The first area 121 may be a liquid area such as water or oil.

 図20(b)に示す位相付与部120は、透過部材141の第2領域122の光学的距離と第1領域121の光学的距離との大小関係が図5(c)の構成と異なる。本変形例において、第2領域122の屈折率は、第1領域121の屈折率よりも小さく、第2領域122における光学的距離が第1領域121における光学的距離よりも小さい。その結果、透過部材141は、第2領域122を透過する光線束と第1領域121を通る光線束との位相差を、第2領域122を透過する光線束の位相が進む向きに調整する。このように、位相付与部120は、第1領域121を透過する光線束の位相に対して、第2領域122を透過する光線束の位相を進めてもよいし相対的に遅らせてもよい。 20B is different from the configuration of FIG. 5C in the magnitude relationship between the optical distance of the second region 122 and the optical distance of the first region 121 of the transmission member 141. In this modification, the refractive index of the second region 122 is smaller than the refractive index of the first region 121, and the optical distance in the second region 122 is smaller than the optical distance in the first region 121. As a result, the transmissive member 141 adjusts the phase difference between the light flux that passes through the second region 122 and the light flux that passes through the first region 121 so that the phase of the light flux that passes through the second region 122 advances. As described above, the phase applying unit 120 may advance or relatively delay the phase of the light beam transmitted through the second region 122 with respect to the phase of the light beam transmitted through the first region 121.

 図20(c)に示す位相付与部120は、透過部材141の第2領域122の形状が、図5(c)の構成と異なる。本変形例において、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見た第2領域122の形状は、円状である。このように、第2領域122の形状、第1領域121の形状は、任意の形状に設定できる。 20C is different from the configuration of FIG. 5C in the shape of the second region 122 of the transmission member 141. In this modification, the shape of the second region 122 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 is a circular shape. As described above, the shape of the second region 122 and the shape of the first region 121 can be set to arbitrary shapes.

 次に、観察装置1aの変形例について説明する。図21は、本変形例に係る観察装置1aを示す図である。本変形例の観察装置1aは、光線束生成部110が図13の構成と異なる。この観察装置1aは、光線束生成部110が、光路回転部材159を含む。この光路回転部材159は、回折格子112と透過部材141との間の光路に配置される。この観察装置1aは、回折格子112で回折した回折光の光路を、回折格子112を回転させる代わりに光路回転部材159によって、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の周りで回転させる。 Next, a modification of the observation apparatus 1a will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1a according to this modification. The observation apparatus 1a of this modification is different from the configuration of FIG. 13 in the light beam generation unit 110. In the observation apparatus 1a, the light beam generation unit 110 includes an optical path rotating member 159. The optical path rotating member 159 is disposed in the optical path between the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 141. In this observation apparatus 1a, the optical path of the diffracted light diffracted by the diffraction grating 112 is rotated around the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 by the optical path rotating member 159 instead of rotating the diffraction grating 112.

 図22は、本変形例に係る光路回転部材159を示す図である。光路回転部材159は、ダブプリズム、又は像回転プリズムと称される光学部材である。光路回転部材159は、回折格子112からの光が入射する入射側端面STIと、入射側端面STIから入射した光が反射する内面SIと、内面SIで反射した光が光路回転部材159の外部へ出射する出射側端面STOとを有する。入射側端面STIは、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対して傾いている。出射側端面STOは、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に垂直な面に関して、入射側端面STIと対称的に光軸AX1に対して傾いている。これら3つの面に垂直な面における光路回転部材159の断面形状は、等脚台形である。この等脚台形において、2つの斜辺の一方は入射側端面STIに対応し、2つの斜辺の他方は出射側端面STO、底辺は内面SIに対応する。 FIG. 22 is a view showing an optical path rotating member 159 according to this modification. The optical path rotating member 159 is an optical member called a dove prism or an image rotating prism. The optical path rotating member 159 includes an incident side end surface STI on which light from the diffraction grating 112 is incident, an inner surface SI on which light incident from the incident side end surface STI is reflected, and light reflected on the inner surface SI to the outside of the optical path rotating member 159. And an exit-side end face STO that exits. The incident-side end surface STI is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The exit-side end surface STO is inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 symmetrically with respect to the incident-side end surface STI with respect to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The cross-sectional shape of the optical path rotating member 159 in a plane perpendicular to these three planes is an isosceles trapezoid. In this isosceles trapezoid, one of the two oblique sides corresponds to the incident side end surface STI, the other of the two oblique sides corresponds to the emission side end surface STO, and the bottom corresponds to the inner surface SI.

 回折格子112から入射側端面STIに入射した回折光は、入射側端面STIで屈折して、内面SIに入射する。本実施形態において、入射側端面STIからの回折光は、内面SIで全反射条件を満たすことにより、内面SIで反射する。内面SIで反射した回折光は、出射側端面STOに入射し、出射側端面STOで屈折して光路回転部材159の外部へ出射する。 The diffracted light that has entered the incident side end surface STI from the diffraction grating 112 is refracted by the incident side end surface STI and is incident on the inner surface SI. In this embodiment, the diffracted light from the incident side end surface STI is reflected by the inner surface SI by satisfying the total reflection condition at the inner surface SI. The diffracted light reflected by the inner surface SI enters the emission-side end surface STO, is refracted by the emission-side end surface STO, and is emitted to the outside of the optical path rotating member 159.

 光路回転部材159は、回転軸AX7の周りで回転可能である。回転軸AX7は、入射側端面STIの中心と出射側端面STOの中心とを結ぶ線上に配置される。回転軸AX7は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1と同軸である。光路回転部材159は、駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転する。この駆動部は、図21に示した駆動制御部160aに制御されて、光路回転部材159を回転させる。駆動制御部160aは、駆動部を制御することによって、光路回転部材159の回転角を制御できる。 The optical path rotating member 159 can rotate around the rotation axis AX7. The rotation axis AX7 is disposed on a line connecting the center of the incident side end face STI and the center of the emission side end face STO. The rotation axis AX7 is coaxial with the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. The optical path rotating member 159 is rotated by torque supplied from the driving unit. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160a shown in FIG. 21 to rotate the optical path rotating member 159. The drive control unit 160a can control the rotation angle of the optical path rotation member 159 by controlling the drive unit.

 回折格子112と光路回転部材159との間において、+1次回折光L1-1の光路と-1次回折光L1-2の光路は、回転軸AX7に関して互いに点対称である。図22においては、光路回転部材159の内面SIは、+1次回折光L1-1と-1次回折光L1-2とを含む面に垂直である。このような光路回転部材159の回転角を、適宜、基準角という。光路回転部材159が基準角にある場合に、図21に示した透過部材141と光路回転部材159との間において、+1次回折光L1-1の光路と-1次回折光L1-2の光路は、回折格子112と光路回転部材159との間の光路と比較すると、回転軸AX7を通り内面SIに平行な面に関して反転した位置関係である。光路回転部材159を回転軸AX7の周りで回転させると、回折格子112と光路回転部材159との間において、+1次回折光L1-1の光路と-1次回折光L1-2の光路は、回転軸AX7に関して互いに点対称な位置関係を維持しつつ、回転軸AX7の周りで回転する。結果として、図21に示した透過部材141において形成される+1次回折光L1-1のスポット光と-1次回折光L1-2のスポット光は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に関して互いに点対称な位置関係を維持しながら、光軸AX1の周りで回転する。駆動制御部160aは、光路回転部材159の回転角を制御することにより、透過部材141上に形成される+1次回折光L1-1のスポット光の位置および-1次回折光L1-2のスポット光の位置を制御できる。 Between the diffraction grating 112 and the optical path rotating member 159, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the −1st order diffracted light L1-2 are point symmetric with respect to the rotation axis AX7. In FIG. 22, the inner surface SI of the optical path rotating member 159 is perpendicular to the plane including the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the −1st order diffracted light L1-2. Such a rotation angle of the optical path rotation member 159 is appropriately referred to as a reference angle. When the optical path rotating member 159 is at the reference angle, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the −1st order diffracted light L1-2 between the transmission member 141 and the optical path rotating member 159 shown in FIG. Compared with the optical path between the diffraction grating 112 and the optical path rotating member 159, the positional relationship is reversed with respect to a plane passing through the rotation axis AX7 and parallel to the inner surface SI. When the optical path rotating member 159 is rotated around the rotation axis AX7, the optical path of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the optical path of the −1st order diffracted light L1-2 between the diffraction grating 112 and the optical path rotating member 159 are rotated. It rotates about the rotation axis AX7 while maintaining a point-symmetrical positional relationship with respect to AX7. As a result, the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the spot light of the −1st order diffracted light L1-2 formed in the transmitting member 141 shown in FIG. 21 are point-symmetric with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150. It rotates around the optical axis AX1 while maintaining the positional relationship. The drive controller 160a controls the rotation angle of the optical path rotating member 159, thereby controlling the position of the spot light of the + 1st order diffracted light L1-1 and the spot light of the −1st order diffracted light L1-2 formed on the transmission member 141. You can control the position.

 [第3の実施形態]
 以下、図面を参照して、本発明の第3の実施形態を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同様である構成及び動作については、説明を簡略化あるいは省略する。
 図23は第3の実施形態に係る観察装置1bを示す図である。本実施形態の観察装置1bは、±1次回折光に加えて、0次回折光を使用して生成した3光束干渉縞によって標本SPを照明する点において、上述した各実施形態と異なる。
[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, about the structure and operation | movement similar to each embodiment mentioned above, description is simplified or abbreviate | omitted.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an observation apparatus 1b according to the third embodiment. The observation apparatus 1b of the present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the specimen SP is illuminated with a three-beam interference fringe generated using zero-order diffracted light in addition to ± first-order diffracted light.

 この3光束を干渉させた場合、標本SP上には、±1次回折光の2光束による干渉縞(干渉縞A)と、0次回折光と1次回折光、0次回折光と-1次回折光による、干渉縞Aの2倍の周期の干渉縞(干渉縞B)が形成されて存在する。このうち0次回折光と1次回折光、0次回折光と-1回折光次による干渉はいずれも対となる入射光が光軸に対して対称ではないため、光軸方向にも干渉縞を作る。この結果、これらの回折光の合成波は標本SP上で光軸に直角な方向だけでなく、光軸方向にも構造を持った干渉縞となる。 When these three light beams are caused to interfere, on the specimen SP, there are interference fringes (interference fringes A) by two light beams of ± 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light and 1st order diffracted light, 0th order diffracted light and −1st order diffracted light, An interference fringe (interference fringe B) having a period twice that of the interference fringe A is formed and present. Of these, the interference caused by the 0th-order diffracted light and the 1st-order diffracted light, and the 0th-order diffracted light and the -1 diffracted light order are not symmetrical with respect to the optical axis. As a result, the combined wave of these diffracted lights becomes interference fringes having a structure not only in the direction perpendicular to the optical axis but also in the optical axis direction on the specimen SP.

 この3光束干渉縞で構造化照明された標本は、2光束干渉縞で構造化照明された実施の形態と同じ光軸に直角な方向の変調に加えて光軸方向にも変調されている。そのため、変調画像を取得して、適切な画像演算を施すと、光軸方向の解像力も向上されたいわゆるセクショニング画像が得られる。 The specimen structured and illuminated with the three-beam interference fringes is modulated in the optical axis direction in addition to the modulation in the direction perpendicular to the same optical axis as the embodiment structured and illuminated with the two-beam interference fringes. Therefore, when a modulated image is acquired and an appropriate image calculation is performed, a so-called sectioning image with improved resolution in the optical axis direction can be obtained.

 このことは、M.G.L.Gustafsson, D.A.Agard, J.W.Sedat ”Doubling the lateral resolution of wide-field fluorescence microscopy using structured illumination” ,Proceedings of the SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering (2000) vol.3919, p.141-50.(非特許文献2)に説明されている。 MGLGustafsson, DAAgard, JWSedat, “Doubling the lateral resolution of wide-field fluorescence microscopy using structured illumination”, Proceedings of the SPIE-The International Society for Optical Engineering (2000) vol.3919, vol.3919 50. (Non-Patent Document 2).

 3光束干渉による構造化照明の画像復元演算には未知数が5つある。それは、標本のもつ空間周波数情報が構造化照明によって回折する各成分のうち、変調画像に含まれるものは、波数空間のfZ=0平面内にある0次成分、±1次成分の3つ、波数空間のfZ≠0平面内にある4つの成分の都合7つの成分であるが、標本の光軸方向の構造の調査はステージのz送り(光軸方向への移動)などによる光学系に対する標本の相対的な移動で実現できるので、波数空間におけるfZ≠0平面内の成分のうちfzの符号のみが異なる2対についてはそれぞれ分離する必要がないからである。したがって、回折光どうしの位相差が相違する位相変調画像を、干渉縞の各方向について、最低5通り取得する必要がある。この観察装置1bは、上述した干渉縞の3方向について、それぞれ5通り、あわせて15通りの位相変調画像を取得する。この観察装置1bの構成について、説明する。 There are five unknowns in the image restoration calculation of structured illumination by three-beam interference. Among the components that the spatial frequency information of the sample is diffracted by the structured illumination, those included in the modulated image are the zero-order component and the ± first-order component in the fZ = 0 plane of the wave number space, Although there are seven components of the four components in the fZ ≠ 0 plane of the wave number space, the structure of the sample in the optical axis direction is investigated by the specimen z-feeding (movement in the optical axis direction), etc. This is because it is not necessary to separate two pairs in which only the sign of fz is different among the components in the fZ ≠ 0 plane in the wave number space. Therefore, it is necessary to acquire at least five types of phase modulation images having different phase differences between diffracted lights in each direction of the interference fringes. This observation apparatus 1b acquires five types of phase-modulated images in each of the three directions of the interference fringes described above and a total of 15 phase-modulated images. The configuration of the observation apparatus 1b will be described.

 この観察装置1bは、照明装置10bと、駆動制御部160bとを備える。
 照明装置10bは、光線束生成部110としての回折格子111を備えている。この回折格子111は、上述した観察装置1が備える回折格子111と同様に、3方向回折格子である。この回折格子111は、照明光学系150との相対位置が固定されており、回転不能に設けられている。
 また、照明装置10bは、光線束生成部110としてのシャッター部材132と、位相付与部120としての透過部材144とを備えている。このシャッター部材132、および透過部材144の構成の一例について、図24を参照して説明する。
The observation device 1b includes an illumination device 10b and a drive control unit 160b.
The illuminating device 10 b includes a diffraction grating 111 as the light beam generation unit 110. This diffraction grating 111 is a three-way diffraction grating, like the diffraction grating 111 provided in the observation apparatus 1 described above. The diffraction grating 111 has a fixed relative position to the illumination optical system 150 and is provided so as not to rotate.
The illumination device 10 b includes a shutter member 132 as the light beam generation unit 110 and a transmission member 144 as the phase applying unit 120. An example of the configuration of the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 will be described with reference to FIG.

 図24は、本実施形態に係るシャッター部材132及び透過部材144をそれぞれ光軸AX1の方向から見た平面図である。シャッター部材132は、図23に示すように、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間の光路に、シャッター部材132の回転軸AX3と、照明光学系150の光軸AX1とを同軸にして配置されている。このシャッター部材132は、回転軸AX3の周りで回転可能であり、電動モーターなどの不図示の駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転軸AX3周りに回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160bに制御されて、シャッター部材132を回転させる。駆動制御部160bは、駆動部を制御することによって、シャッター部材132の回転角を制御できる。 FIG. 24 is a plan view of the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1. As shown in FIG. 23, the shutter member 132 is arranged in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA with the rotation axis AX3 of the shutter member 132 and the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150 being coaxial. ing. The shutter member 132 can rotate around the rotation axis AX3, and rotates around the rotation axis AX3 by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the shutter member 132. The drive control unit 160b can control the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 by controlling the drive unit.

 また、シャッター部材132は、図24(a)に示すように、光が通過可能な通過部ATと、光を遮る遮光部ASとを有する点で、上述したシャッター部材131と同様である。また、このシャッター部材132は、第1通過部ATaおよび第2通過部ATbに加えて、第3通過部ATcを備える点において、上述したシャッター部材131と相違する。この第3通過部ATcは、回転軸AX3の周囲に、回転軸AX3を中心とする円形の開口である。上述したシャッター部材131は、この第3通過部ATcに相当する部分が開口しておらず、回折格子111から入射する0次回折光を遮光する。一方、このシャッター部材132は、第3通過部ATcにより、0次回折光を遮光することなく通過させる。また、シャッター部材132は、上述したシャッター部材131と同様に、第1通過部ATaおよび第2通過部ATbにより、±1次回折光を通過させる。つまり、このシャッター部材132によれば、±1次回折光に加えて、0次回折光を通過させることができる。また、これら第1通過部ATaおよび第2通過部ATbは、シャッター部材132上の基準点Pから左回りに、遮光部、第2通過部ATb、遮光部、第1通過部ATaの順に配置される。 Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the shutter member 132 is the same as the shutter member 131 described above in that it has a passage portion AT through which light can pass and a light shielding portion AS that blocks light. The shutter member 132 is different from the shutter member 131 described above in that the shutter member 132 includes a third passage portion ATc in addition to the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb. The third passage portion ATc is a circular opening around the rotation axis AX3 with the rotation axis AX3 as the center. The shutter member 131 described above does not have an opening corresponding to the third passage portion ATc, and shields the 0th-order diffracted light incident from the diffraction grating 111. On the other hand, the shutter member 132 allows the 0th-order diffracted light to pass therethrough without being blocked by the third passage portion ATc. Similarly to the shutter member 131 described above, the shutter member 132 allows ± first-order diffracted light to pass through the first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb. That is, according to the shutter member 132, 0th-order diffracted light can be transmitted in addition to ± 1st-order diffracted light. The first passage portion ATa and the second passage portion ATb are arranged in the order of the light shielding portion, the second passage portion ATb, the light shielding portion, and the first passage portion ATa in the counterclockwise direction from the reference point P on the shutter member 132. The

 透過部材144は、図23に示すように、共役面OS1の位置に配置されている。透過部材144は、板状の部材であり、光源101からの光が入射する面が照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対してほぼ垂直に、かつ、透過部材144の回転軸AX4と、光軸AX1とが同軸にして配置されている。この透過部材144は、回転軸AX4の周りで回転可能であり、電動モーターなどの駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転軸AX4周りに回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160bに制御されて、透過部材144を回転させる。駆動制御部160bは、駆動部を制御することによって、透過部材144の回転角を制御できる。 As shown in FIG. 23, the transmitting member 144 is disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1. The transmission member 144 is a plate-like member, the surface on which light from the light source 101 is incident is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, and the rotation axis AX4 of the transmission member 144 and the optical axis. AX1 is arranged coaxially. The transmission member 144 can rotate around the rotation axis AX4, and rotates around the rotation axis AX4 by torque supplied from a drive unit such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the transmission member 144. The drive control unit 160b can control the rotation angle of the transmission member 144 by controlling the drive unit.

 また、透過部材144は、図24(b)に示すように、第1領域121(基準位相領域)および第2領域122(位相変調領域)を含む点において、上述した透過部材141と同様である。また、この透過部材144は、第2領域122は、第1領域121との厚みがそれぞれ異なる4つの領域を含む点において、上述した透過部材141と相違する。この第2領域122に含まれる4つの領域とは、A領域122a、B領域122b、C領域122c、およびD領域122dである。この透過部材144において、第1領域121、およびA領域122a~D領域122dの中心角の大きさは、それぞれ60°である。
第1領域121とA領域122aとは、回転軸AX4を中心にする回転対称の位置に配置される。また、B領域122bとD領域122dとは、回転軸AX4を中心にする回転対称の位置に配置される。また、C領域122cは、回転軸AX4の周囲を含むようにして、2つのC領域122cが回転軸AX4を中心にする回転対称の位置に配置される。また、これらの各領域は、透過部材144上の基準点Qから左回りに、C領域122c、B領域122b、A領域122a、C領域122c、D領域122d、第1領域121の順に配置される。
Further, as shown in FIG. 24B, the transmissive member 144 is similar to the transmissive member 141 described above in that it includes a first region 121 (reference phase region) and a second region 122 (phase modulation region). . In addition, the transmission member 144 is different from the transmission member 141 described above in that the second region 122 includes four regions each having a thickness different from that of the first region 121. The four regions included in the second region 122 are an A region 122a, a B region 122b, a C region 122c, and a D region 122d. In the transmissive member 144, the central angles of the first region 121 and the A region 122a to D region 122d are each 60 °.
The first region 121 and the A region 122a are arranged at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. Further, the B region 122b and the D region 122d are disposed at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. Further, the C region 122c includes the periphery of the rotation axis AX4, and the two C regions 122c are arranged at rotationally symmetric positions around the rotation axis AX4. These regions are arranged in the order of C region 122c, B region 122b, A region 122a, C region 122c, D region 122d, and first region 121 in the counterclockwise direction from the reference point Q on the transmission member 144. .

 また、このA領域122a~D領域122dの厚みは、次のように設定されている。すなわち、A領域122aの厚みは、第1領域121を透過する回折光と、A領域122aを透過する回折光との位相差が、16π/5相当になるように設定されている。
 また、B領域122bの厚みは、第1領域121を透過する回折光と、B領域122bを透過する回折光との位相差が、14π/5相当になるように設定されている。
 また、C領域122cの厚みは、第1領域121を透過する回折光と、C領域122cを透過する回折光との位相差が、8π/5相当になるように設定されている。
 また、D領域122dの厚みは、第1領域121を透過する回折光と、D領域122dを透過する回折光との位相差が、2π/5相当になるように設定されている。
The thicknesses of the A region 122a to the D region 122d are set as follows. That is, the thickness of the A region 122a is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the A region 122a is equivalent to 16π / 5.
The thickness of the B region 122b is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the B region 122b is equivalent to 14π / 5.
The thickness of the C region 122c is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the C region 122c is equivalent to 8π / 5.
The thickness of the D region 122d is set so that the phase difference between the diffracted light transmitted through the first region 121 and the diffracted light transmitted through the D region 122d is equivalent to 2π / 5.

 次に、図25~図27を参照して、駆動制御部160bが、3方向の干渉縞の方向について、それぞれ5通りの位相変調画像を取得する手順について説明する。
 図25および図26は、光線束生成部及び位相付与部の位置関係の一例を示す模式図である。駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132と透過部材144とを停止させることなく、シャッター部材132の回転角と、透過部材144の回転角とを、図25および図26に示すパターン1~18の18通りに変化させる。この一例においては、駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132の回転速度と、透過部材144の回転速度とを一致させ、かつ、0次回折光と、±1次回折光とがシャッター部材132を通過するようにして、シャッター部材132と透過部材144とを連続的に回転駆動する。また、上述したように、0次回折光は、シャッター部材132の回転角、および透過部材144の回転角によらず透過部材144のC領域122cを透過する。以下、0次回折光が透過部材144のC領域122cを透過することについては、説明を省略する。
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a description will be given of a procedure in which the drive control unit 160b acquires five types of phase-modulated images for each of the three interference fringe directions.
25 and 26 are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of the positional relationship between the light beam generation unit and the phase providing unit. The drive controller 160b sets the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 and the rotation angle of the transmission member 144 without stopping the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144, and 18 of patterns 1 to 18 shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. Change the street. In this example, the drive control unit 160b matches the rotation speed of the shutter member 132 with the rotation speed of the transmission member 144, and causes the 0th-order diffracted light and the ± 1st-order diffracted light to pass through the shutter member 132. Thus, the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are continuously driven to rotate. Further, as described above, the 0th-order diffracted light is transmitted through the C region 122 c of the transmission member 144 regardless of the rotation angle of the shutter member 132 and the rotation angle of the transmission member 144. Hereinafter, description of the 0th-order diffracted light passing through the C region 122c of the transmissive member 144 is omitted.

 まず、図25のパターン1~3について説明する。駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132を回転角0°に、透過部材144を回転角0°にする(パターン1:図27の時刻T10~時刻T10’)。このパターン1において、第1方向D1の±1次回折光がシャッター部材132を通過する。この+1次回折光は、透過部材144の第1領域121(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A1)を透過する。また、-1次回折光は、透過部材144のA領域122a(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A2)を透過する。以下、このパターン1におけるシャッター部材132の基準点Pの位置を、シャッター部材132の原点位置と記載する。また、このパターン1における透過部材144の基準点Qの位置を、透過部材144の原点位置と記載する。 First, patterns 1 to 3 in FIG. 25 will be described. The drive controller 160b sets the shutter member 132 to a rotation angle of 0 ° and the transmission member 144 to a rotation angle of 0 ° (Pattern 1: Time T10 to Time T10 ′ in FIG. 27). In this pattern 1, ± 1st-order diffracted light in the first direction D1 passes through the shutter member 132. The + 1st order diffracted light passes through the first region 121 (region A1 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144. Further, the −1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (region A2 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144. Hereinafter, the position of the reference point P of the shutter member 132 in the pattern 1 is referred to as the origin position of the shutter member 132. Further, the position of the reference point Q of the transmission member 144 in the pattern 1 is referred to as the origin position of the transmission member 144.

 次に、駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132について、基準点Pを原点位置から左回りに60°回転させた回転角60°に、透過部材144について、基準点Qを原点位置から左回りに80°回転させた回転角80°にする(パターン2:図27の時刻T11~時刻T11’)。このパターン2において、第2方向D2の±1次回折光がシャッター部材132を通過する。この+1次回折光は、透過部材144の第1領域121(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A3)を透過する。また、-1次回折光は、透過部材144のA領域122a(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A4)を透過する。 Next, the drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P 60 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position with respect to the shutter member 132 to a rotation angle 60 °, and the transmission member 144 sets the reference point Q counterclockwise from the origin position. The rotation angle is 80 ° (pattern 2: time T11 to time T11 ′ in FIG. 27). In the pattern 2, ± 1st order diffracted light in the second direction D2 passes through the shutter member 132. The + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the first region 121 (region A3 where a spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144. Further, the −1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (the region A4 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144.

 次に、駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132について、基準点Pを原点位置から左回りに120°回転させた回転角120°に、透過部材144について、基準点Qを原点位置から左回りに160°回転させた回転角160°にする(パターン3:図27の時刻T12~時刻T12’)。このパターン3において、第3方向D3の±1次回折光がシャッター部材132を通過する。この+1次回折光は、透過部材144の第1領域121(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A5)を透過する。また、-1次回折光は、透過部材144のA領域122a(共役面OS1上において、スポットが形成される領域A6)を透過する。 Next, the drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P by 120 ° counterclockwise from the origin position for the shutter member 132 at a rotation angle of 120 °, and the transmission member 144 sets the reference point Q counterclockwise from the origin position. The rotation angle is 160 ° rotated by 160 ° (Pattern 3: Time T12 to Time T12 ′ in FIG. 27). In the pattern 3, ± 1st-order diffracted light in the third direction D3 passes through the shutter member 132. The + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the first region 121 (region A5 where a spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmission member 144. Further, the −1st order diffracted light passes through the A region 122a (the region A6 where the spot is formed on the conjugate plane OS1) of the transmitting member 144.

 このように、駆動制御部160bは、パターン1~3において、第1方向D1~第3方向D3の+1次回折光が第1領域121を、-1次回折光がA領域122aを、それぞれ透過するように、シャッター部材132と、透過部材144とを回転駆動する。これにより、パターン1~3において、±1次回折光の位相差は、-16π/5(すなわち、4π/5)になる。また、+1次回折光と0次回折光との位相差は、-8π/5(すなわち、2π/5)になる。また、-1次回折光と0次回折光との位相差は、-8π/5(すなわち、2π/5)になる。つまり、駆動制御部160bは、パターン1~3において、各回折光の位相差を変化させずに、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる。 As described above, in the patterns 1 to 3, the drive control unit 160b transmits the + 1st order diffracted light in the first direction D1 to the third direction D3 through the first region 121 and the −1st order diffracted light through the A region 122a. Further, the shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are driven to rotate. As a result, in the patterns 1 to 3, the phase difference of the ± first-order diffracted light becomes −16π / 5 (that is, 4π / 5). The phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is −8π / 5 (ie, 2π / 5). The phase difference between the −1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is −8π / 5 (ie, 2π / 5). That is, in the patterns 1 to 3, the drive control unit 160b changes the direction of the interference fringes in three ways without changing the phase difference of each diffracted light.

 次に、図25のパターン4~6について説明する。駆動制御部160bは、シャッター部材132について、基準点Pを原点位置から左回りに180°回転させた回転角180°に、透過部材144について、基準点Qを原点位置から左回りに240°回転させた回転角240°にする(パターン4:図27の時刻T13~時刻T13’)。このパターン4において、第1方向D1の周期構造により回折した±1次回折光がシャッター部材132を通過する。この+1次回折光は、透過部材144のD領域122aを透過する。また、-1次回折光は、透過部材144のB領域122bを透過する。このため、パターン4において、±1次回折光の位相差は、-12π/5(すなわち、8π/5)になる。また、+1次回折光と0次回折光との位相差は、-6π/5(すなわち、4π/5)になる。また、-1次回折光と0次回折光との位相差は、-6π/5(すなわち、4π/5)になる。 Next, patterns 4 to 6 in FIG. 25 will be described. The drive control unit 160b rotates the reference point P 180 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position for the shutter member 132 and rotates the reference point Q 240 degrees counterclockwise from the origin position for the transmission member 144. The rotation angle is set to 240 ° (pattern 4: time T13 to time T13 ′ in FIG. 27). In the pattern 4, ± 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 passes through the shutter member 132. The + 1st order diffracted light passes through the D region 122a of the transmissive member 144. Further, the −1st order diffracted light passes through the B region 122b of the transmission member 144. For this reason, in the pattern 4, the phase difference of the ± first-order diffracted light is −12π / 5 (that is, 8π / 5). In addition, the phase difference between the + 1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is −6π / 5 (that is, 4π / 5). The phase difference between the −1st order diffracted light and the 0th order diffracted light is −6π / 5 (ie, 4π / 5).

 パターン5~6において、第2方向D2および第3方向D3についてもパターン4と同様に、+1次回折光は、透過部材144のD領域122aを透過し、-1次回折光は、透過部材144のB領域122bを透過する。このように、駆動制御部160bは、パターン4~6において、第1方向D1~第3方向D3の周期構造により回折した+1次回折光がD領域122aを、-1次回折光がB領域122bを、それぞれ透過するように、シャッター部材132と、透過部材144とを回転駆動する。つまり、駆動制御部160bは、パターン4~6において、各回折光の位相差を変化させずに、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させる。 In the patterns 5 to 6, in the second direction D2 and the third direction D3 as well as the pattern 4, the + 1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the D region 122a of the transmission member 144, and the −1st order diffracted light is transmitted through the B of the transmission member 144. The region 122b is transmitted. In this way, in the patterns 4 to 6, the drive control unit 160b has the + 1st order diffracted light diffracted by the periodic structure in the first direction D1 to the third direction D3 in the D region 122a, the −1st order diffracted light in the B region 122b, The shutter member 132 and the transmissive member 144 are rotationally driven so as to transmit each. That is, in the patterns 4 to 6, the drive control unit 160b changes the direction of the interference fringes in three ways without changing the phase difference of each diffracted light.

 以下、パターン7~15においても上述と同様であるため、説明を省略する。なお、図25に示すパターン16~18においては、撮像部210は、位相変調画像を撮像しない。また、パターン9(図27の時刻T18~時刻T18’)からパターン10(図27の時刻T19~時刻T19’)に変化する場合には、駆動制御部160bは、遮光部材(例えば、絞り部材155)によって回折光を遮光しつつ、シャッター部材132と、透過部材144とを回転駆動する。これにより不要な回折光による干渉縞が標本SP上に形成されることを防ぐ(言い換えると、不要な回折光が撮像部210に入射することを防ぐ)ことができる。 Hereinafter, since the patterns 7 to 15 are the same as described above, the description thereof is omitted. Note that in the patterns 16 to 18 shown in FIG. 25, the imaging unit 210 does not capture a phase-modulated image. When the pattern 9 (from time T18 to time T18 ′ in FIG. 27) changes to the pattern 10 (from time T19 to time T19 ′ in FIG. 27), the drive control unit 160b causes the light shielding member (for example, the diaphragm member 155). The shutter member 132 and the transmission member 144 are rotationally driven while shielding the diffracted light. Thereby, interference fringes due to unnecessary diffracted light can be prevented from being formed on the specimen SP (in other words, unnecessary diffracted light can be prevented from entering the imaging unit 210).

 このようにして駆動制御部160bは、回折光の位相差を5通りに、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させて、あわせて15通りの干渉縞の状態を生成することができる。具体的には、干渉縞の各方向について、各回折光に対して、次に示す位相差を与えることができる。 In this way, the drive controller 160b can generate 15 different interference fringe states by changing the phase difference of the diffracted light to 5 ways and the direction of the interference fringes to 3 ways. Specifically, the following phase difference can be given to each diffracted light in each direction of the interference fringes.

               +1次:-1次 +1次:0次 0次:-1次
(パターン 1、 2、 3)  4π/5    2π/5   2π/5
(パターン 4、 5、 6)  8π/5    4π/5   4π/5
(パターン 7、 8、 9)  0       0      0
(パターン10、11、12) 16π/5    8π/5   8π/5
(パターン13、14、15) 12π/5    6π/5   6π/5
+ 1st order: -1st order + 1st order: 0th order 0th order: -1st order (patterns 1, 2, 3) 4π / 5 2π / 5 2π / 5
(Pattern 4, 5, 6) 8π / 5 4π / 5 4π / 5
(Pattern 7, 8, 9) 0 0 0
(Patterns 10, 11, and 12) 16π / 5 8π / 5 8π / 5
(Patterns 13, 14, and 15) 12π / 5 6π / 5 6π / 5

 以上説明したように、本実施形態の観察装置1bは、3光束を干渉させる場合に、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させつつ、回折光の位相差を5通りに変化させることができる。この干渉縞を撮像した変調画像を取得して、適切な画像演算を施すと、光軸方向の解像力も向上されたいわゆるセクショニング画像が得られる。すなわち、観察装置1bによれば、光軸方向の解像力も向上させることができる。 As described above, the observation apparatus 1b according to the present embodiment can change the phase difference of the diffracted light in five ways while changing the direction of the interference fringes in three ways when the three light beams interfere with each other. When a modulated image obtained by imaging the interference fringes is acquired and appropriate image calculation is performed, a so-called sectioning image with improved resolution in the optical axis direction is obtained. That is, according to the observation apparatus 1b, the resolving power in the optical axis direction can also be improved.

 本実施形態の観察装置1bによれば、上述の第1の実施形態と同様に、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができる。 According to the observation apparatus 1b of the present embodiment, the time until a super-resolution image is generated can be shortened as in the first embodiment described above.

 なお、この観察装置1bは、シャッター部材131および透過部材144を上述した方向と逆方向に回転させてもよい。
 また、この観察装置1bは、回折格子111とシャッター部材131とに代えて、上述の第2の実施形態のように、1方向回折格子である回折格子112を備えていてもよい。この場合には、回折格子112は、上述した観察装置1aが備える回折格子112と同様に、1方向回折格子であり、電動モーターなどの不図示の駆動部から供給されるトルクにより回転する。この駆動部は、駆動制御部160bに制御されて、回折格子112を回転させる。駆動制御部160bは、回折格子112の駆動部を制御することによって、回折格子112の回転角を制御できる。
 また、この場合には、回折格子112と、透過部材144とを連続回転させてもよく、回折格子112のみを連続回転させてもよい。
 このように構成しても、本実施形態の観察装置1bは、3光束を干渉させる場合に、干渉縞の方向を3通りに変化させつつ、回折光の位相差を5通りに変化させることができる。
 この場合、上述の第2の実施形態と同様に、超解像画像を生成するまでの時間を短縮することができる。
The observation apparatus 1b may rotate the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 144 in the direction opposite to the above-described direction.
Further, this observation apparatus 1b may include a diffraction grating 112 that is a one-way diffraction grating as in the second embodiment described above, instead of the diffraction grating 111 and the shutter member 131. In this case, the diffraction grating 112 is a unidirectional diffraction grating, like the diffraction grating 112 provided in the observation apparatus 1a described above, and rotates by torque supplied from a driving unit (not shown) such as an electric motor. This drive unit is controlled by the drive control unit 160b to rotate the diffraction grating 112. The drive control unit 160 b can control the rotation angle of the diffraction grating 112 by controlling the drive unit of the diffraction grating 112.
In this case, the diffraction grating 112 and the transmission member 144 may be continuously rotated, or only the diffraction grating 112 may be continuously rotated.
Even with this configuration, the observation device 1b of the present embodiment can change the phase difference of the diffracted light in five ways while changing the direction of the interference fringes in three ways when the three light beams interfere with each other. it can.
In this case, similarly to the second embodiment described above, it is possible to shorten the time until a super-resolution image is generated.

 以上、本発明の実施形態を、図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で適宜変更を加えることができる。上述した各実施形態に記載の構成を組み合わせてもよい。 The embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and appropriate modifications may be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. it can. You may combine the structure as described in each embodiment mentioned above.

 なお、図2などにおいて回折格子111は、回折方向が3方向の3方向回折格子であるが、回折方向が2方向の2方向回折格子であってもよいし、回折方向が4方向以上の多方向回折格子であってもよい。回折格子111は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対して非垂直に傾いていてもよい。 In FIG. 2 and the like, the diffraction grating 111 is a three-way diffraction grating having three diffraction directions, but may be a two-way diffraction grating having two diffraction directions, or may have many diffraction directions having four or more diffraction directions. It may be a directional diffraction grating. The diffraction grating 111 may be tilted non-perpendicularly with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.

 なお、図1などにおいてシャッター部材131(または、シャッター部材132。以下の説明において同じ。)は、投影レンズ151と共役面OS1との間の光路に配置されているが、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間において、回折格子111で回折した複数の光線束の光路が互いに重複しない、いずれの位置に配置されていてもよい。例えば、シャッター部材131は、共役面OS1とリレーレンズ152との間の光路に配置されていてもよいし、回折格子111と投影レンズ151との間に配置されていてもよいし、対物レンズ154において共役面OS1と光学的に共役な面の位置またはその近傍に配置されていてもよい。但し、各回折光のスポットサイズは、投影レンズ151とリレーレンズ152の間の光路において、共役面OS1の位置で極小になり、回折光のスポットの間隔は、投影レンズ151とリレーレンズ152の間の光路において、共役面OS1の位置で極大になる。そのため、照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向において、シャッター部材131が共役面OS1の近くに配置されているほど、シャッター部材131により光線束の選択しやすくなる。 In FIG. 1 and the like, the shutter member 131 (or the shutter member 132; the same in the following description) is disposed in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the conjugate plane OS1, but the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination region Between LA, the optical paths of a plurality of light beams diffracted by the diffraction grating 111 may be arranged at any position where they do not overlap each other. For example, the shutter member 131 may be disposed in the optical path between the conjugate plane OS1 and the relay lens 152, may be disposed between the diffraction grating 111 and the projection lens 151, or may be the objective lens 154. In FIG. 2, the optical axis may be disposed at or near the position of a plane optically conjugate with the conjugate plane OS1. However, the spot size of each diffracted light is minimized at the position of the conjugate plane OS1 in the optical path between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152, and the interval between the spots of the diffracted light is between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152. In this optical path, the maximum is obtained at the position of the conjugate plane OS1. Therefore, the closer the shutter member 131 is to the conjugate plane OS1 in the direction of the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150, the easier it is for the light beam to be selected by the shutter member 131.

 なお、シャッター部材131は、円板状でなくてもよく、例えば照明光学系150の光軸AX1の方向から見た外形が三角形、矩形、その他の多角形、楕円形、直線と自由曲線の一方または双方で囲まれる形状のいずれでもよい。シャッター部材131は、板状でなくてもよく、例えばブロック状でもよい。シャッター部材131の回転軸は、照明光学系150の光軸AX1に対して光軸AX1に対して傾いていてもよい。 The shutter member 131 does not have to be disk-shaped, and for example, the outer shape of the illumination optical system 150 viewed from the direction of the optical axis AX1 is triangular, rectangular, other polygons, ellipse, straight line, or free curve. Or any of the shapes enclosed by both sides may be sufficient. The shutter member 131 may not be plate-shaped, and may be block-shaped, for example. The rotation axis of the shutter member 131 may be inclined with respect to the optical axis AX1 with respect to the optical axis AX1 of the illumination optical system 150.

 なお、図5などにおいて透過部材141(または、透過部材144。以下の説明において同じ。)は、板状であるが、ブロック状であってもよい。また、透過部材141は、回折格子111と照明領域LAとの間の光路において、回折格子111から射出した複数の回折光の光路が互いに重複しない、いずれの位置に配置されていてもよい。図5などにおいて、第2領域122と第1領域121がそれぞれ1つであるが、第2領域122と第1領域121の一方または双方は、回転軸AX4の周りの周方向で互いに異なる位置に配置された複数の領域を含んでいてもよい。透過部材141のうち光学的距離が互いに異なる領域の数は2つであるが、3つ以上でもよい。
 また、図5などにおいて透過部材141は、共役面OS1の位置に配置されているとして説明したが、これに限られない。この透過部材141は、+1次回折光と-1次回折光とが、透過部材141上の互いに異なる位置に入射するような位置に配置されればよく、例えば、投影レンズ151とリレーレンズ152との間の位置に配置されればよい。
In FIG. 5 and the like, the transmissive member 141 (or the transmissive member 144; the same in the following description) is plate-shaped, but may be block-shaped. The transmissive member 141 may be disposed at any position where the optical paths of the plurality of diffracted lights emitted from the diffraction grating 111 do not overlap with each other in the optical path between the diffraction grating 111 and the illumination area LA. In FIG. 5 and the like, each of the second region 122 and the first region 121 is one, but one or both of the second region 122 and the first region 121 are at different positions in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis AX4. A plurality of arranged regions may be included. The number of regions having different optical distances in the transmissive member 141 is two, but may be three or more.
Further, in FIG. 5 and the like, the transmission member 141 has been described as being disposed at the position of the conjugate plane OS1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The transmission member 141 may be disposed at a position where the + 1st order diffracted light and the −1st order diffracted light are incident on different positions on the transmission member 141, for example, between the projection lens 151 and the relay lens 152. It suffices to be arranged at the position of

 なお、透過部材141には、回転軸AX4上に透過部材141の重心が配置されるように、重心調整部が設けられていてもよい。この重心調整部は、例えば、回折格子111からの回折光が入射しない位置に設けられた膜などであってもよい。また、透過部材141は、回転軸AX4上に透過部材141の重心が配置されるように形状が調整されていてもよく、重心の調整用に切欠、孔部などが形成されていてもよい。 It should be noted that the transmission member 141 may be provided with a center-of-gravity adjustment unit so that the center of gravity of the transmission member 141 is disposed on the rotation axis AX4. This center-of-gravity adjustment unit may be, for example, a film provided at a position where diffracted light from the diffraction grating 111 is not incident. Further, the shape of the transmission member 141 may be adjusted so that the center of gravity of the transmission member 141 is disposed on the rotation axis AX4, and a notch, a hole, or the like may be formed for adjusting the center of gravity.

 なお、光源装置100の構成については、適宜変更可能である。上述の実施形態において、光源装置100は、照明装置10、10a、10bの一部であるが、光源装置100の少なくとも一部が照明装置10、10a、10bの外部の装置であってもよい。また、光源101は、レーザダイオードに限られず、半導体レーザや、固体レーザ、ガスレーザなど様々な発光素子とすることができる。 In addition, about the structure of the light source device 100, it can change suitably. In the above-described embodiment, the light source device 100 is a part of the illumination devices 10, 10a, and 10b. However, at least a part of the light source device 100 may be an external device of the illumination devices 10, 10a, and 10b. The light source 101 is not limited to a laser diode, and can be various light emitting elements such as a semiconductor laser, a solid-state laser, and a gas laser.

 なお、不要な回折光による干渉縞が標本SP上に形成されることを防ぐ遮光部材は、絞り部材155でなくてもよく、例えば、光源装置100に設けられた不図示のレーザーシャッターであってもよく、遮光するために様々な部材を使用することができる。また、遮光部材でなくてもよく、例えば、光源装置100のレーザー生成を一時的に停止させてもよい。 Note that the light blocking member that prevents the formation of interference fringes due to unnecessary diffracted light on the specimen SP may not be the diaphragm member 155, for example, a laser shutter (not shown) provided in the light source device 100. In addition, various members can be used for light shielding. Moreover, it may not be a light shielding member, for example, you may stop the laser generation of the light source device 100 temporarily.

 なお、図1などには各レンズが1つの部材で描かれているが、各レンズが有するレンズ部材の数は、1つでもよいし2つ以上でもよい。照明光学系150は、回転対称な形状のレンズ部材の一部をカットしたカットレンズを含んでいてもよいし、回転非対称な自由曲面レンズを含んでいてもよい。 In addition, although each lens is drawn by one member in FIG. 1 etc., the number of lens members which each lens has may be one, and may be two or more. The illumination optical system 150 may include a cut lens obtained by cutting a part of a rotationally symmetric lens member, or may include a rotationally asymmetric free-form surface lens.

 なお、図1などにおいて照明光学系150は、パワーを有する反射部材を含まない屈折系の光学系であるが、パワーを有するレンズ部材およびパワーを有する反射部材をいずれも含む反射屈折系の光学系であってもよい。また、照明光学系150は、パワーを有する反射部材を含み、パワーを有するレンズ部材を含まない反射系の光学系であってもよい。パワーを有する反射部材は、例えば凹面鏡、凸面鏡などである。 In FIG. 1 and the like, the illumination optical system 150 is a refractive optical system that does not include a reflective member having power, but a catadioptric optical system that includes both a lens member having power and a reflective member having power. It may be. Further, the illumination optical system 150 may be a reflective optical system that includes a reflective member having power and does not include a lens member having power. The reflecting member having power is, for example, a concave mirror or a convex mirror.

 なお、照明光学系150は、屈折系、反射屈折系、反射系のいずれの構成においても、パワーを有していない反射部材とパワーを有していない透過部材の一方または双方を含んでいてもよい。 The illumination optical system 150 may include one or both of a reflecting member having no power and a transmitting member having no power in any of the refractive system, the catadioptric system, and the reflecting system. Good.

 また、駆動制御部160、160bが、タイミングT3’~T7の間において、シャッター部材131を連続的に回転させつつ、透過部材141の回転動作と停止動作とを切換えて制御する一例について説明したが、これに限られない。例えば、駆動制御部160、160bは、タイミングT3’~T7の間において、シャッター部材131を連続的に回転させつつ、透過部材141の回転速度をシャッター部材131の回転速度よりも遅い回転速度にして、透過部材141を連続的に回転させるように制御してもよい。より具体的には、駆動制御部160、160bは、タイミングT3’~T7の間において、透過部材141の回転速度をシャッター部材131の回転速度の1/3の回転速度にして、透過部材141を連続的に回転させるように制御してもよい。 In addition, an example has been described in which the drive control units 160 and 160b switch between the rotation operation and the stop operation of the transmission member 141 while continuously rotating the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 ′ to T7. Not limited to this. For example, the drive control units 160 and 160b rotate the shutter member 131 continuously between timings T3 ′ to T7, and set the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 to a rotation speed slower than the rotation speed of the shutter member 131. The transmission member 141 may be controlled to be continuously rotated. More specifically, the drive control units 160 and 160b change the rotation speed of the transmission member 141 to 1/3 of the rotation speed of the shutter member 131 between the timings T3 ′ to T7, and sets the transmission member 141. You may control so that it may rotate continuously.

 なお、上述において、撮像制御部212が制御する露光タイミングにあわせて、駆動制御部160、160bが、シャッター部材131と透過部材141とを制御する構成について説明したが、これに限られない。例えば、駆動制御部160、160bが、撮像部210の露光タイミングを制御する構成であってもよい。 In the above description, the configuration in which the drive control units 160 and 160b control the shutter member 131 and the transmission member 141 in accordance with the exposure timing controlled by the imaging control unit 212 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the drive control units 160 and 160b may be configured to control the exposure timing of the imaging unit 210.

 なお、上述した各実施形態の観察装置1、1a、1bが備える各制御部(駆動制御部160、160a、160b、撮像制御部212、演算部220)が備える各部は、専用のハードウェアにより実現されるものであってもよく、また、メモリおよびマイクロプロセッサにより実現させるものであってもよい。 In addition, each part with which each control part (The drive control part 160, 160a, 160b, the imaging control part 212, the calculating part 220) with which observation apparatus 1, 1a, 1b of each embodiment mentioned above is provided is implement | achieved by dedicated hardware. Or may be realized by a memory and a microprocessor.

 なお、上述の各実施形態の駆動制御部160、160a、160bは、照明装置10、10a、10bに設けられているが、照明装置10、10a、10bの内部に設けられていなくてもよい。例えば、観察装置1、1a、1bの内部であれば、照明装置10、10a、10bの外部であってもよいし、観察装置1、1a、1bの外部の演算装置(不図示)の内部にあってもよい。同様に、演算部220も観察装置1、1a、1bの外部の演算装置(不図示)の内部にあってもよい。また、駆動制御部160、160a、160bと演算部220とが観察装置1、1a、1bの外部の共通の演算装置(不図示)の内部にあってもよい。 In addition, although the drive control parts 160, 160a, and 160b of each above-mentioned embodiment are provided in the illuminating devices 10, 10a, and 10b, they do not need to be provided in the illuminating devices 10, 10a, and 10b. For example, as long as it is inside the observation device 1, 1a, 1b, it may be outside the illumination device 10, 10a, 10b, or inside an arithmetic unit (not shown) outside the observation device 1, 1a, 1b. There may be. Similarly, the calculation unit 220 may also be inside a calculation device (not shown) outside the observation devices 1, 1a, 1b. Further, the drive control units 160, 160a, 160b and the calculation unit 220 may be inside a common calculation device (not shown) outside the observation devices 1, 1a, 1b.

 なお、観察装置1、1a、1bが備える各制御部は、メモリおよびCPU(中央演算装置)により構成され、表示装置が備える各部の機能を実現するためのプログラムをメモリにロードして実行することによりその機能を実現させるものであってもよい。 In addition, each control part with which the observation apparatus 1, 1a, 1b is comprised is comprised with memory and CPU (central processing unit), and the program for implement | achieving the function of each part with which a display apparatus is provided is loaded to memory, and is performed. The function may be realized by.

 また、観察装置1、1a、1bが備える各制御部の機能を実現するためのプログラムをコンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録して、この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することにより、制御部が備える各部による処理を行ってもよい。なお、ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、OSや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。 Also, a program for realizing the functions of the control units included in the observation apparatuses 1, 1a, and 1b is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is read into a computer system and executed. By doing so, you may perform the process by each part with which a control part is provided. Here, the “computer system” includes an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices.

 また、「コンピュータシステム」は、WWWシステムを利用している場合であれば、ホームページ提供環境(あるいは表示環境)も含むものとする。
 また、「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、フレキシブルディスク、光磁気ディスク、ROM、CD-ROM等の可搬媒体、コンピュータシステムに内蔵されるハードディスク等の記憶装置のことをいう。さらに「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、インターネット等のネットワークや電話回線等の通信回線を介してプログラムを送信する場合の通信線のように、短時間の間、動的にプログラムを保持するもの、その場合のサーバやクライアントとなるコンピュータシステム内部の揮発性メモリのように、一定時間プログラムを保持しているものも含むものとする。また上記プログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現するためのものであってもよく、さらに前述した機能をコンピュータシステムにすでに記録されているプログラムとの組み合わせで実現できるものであってもよい。
Further, the “computer system” includes a homepage providing environment (or display environment) if a WWW system is used.
The “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a storage device such as a flexible medium, a magneto-optical disk, a portable medium such as a ROM or a CD-ROM, and a hard disk incorporated in a computer system. Furthermore, the “computer-readable recording medium” dynamically holds a program for a short time like a communication line when transmitting a program via a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. In this case, a volatile memory in a computer system serving as a server or a client in that case, and a program that holds a program for a certain period of time are also included. The program may be a program for realizing a part of the functions described above, and may be a program capable of realizing the functions described above in combination with a program already recorded in a computer system.

 なお、上述の各実施形態の要件は、適宜組み合わせることができる。また、一部の構成要素を用いない場合もある。また、法令で許容される限りにおいて、上述の各実施形態及び変形例で引用した照明装置や観察装置、観察方法などに関する全ての公開公報及び米国特許の開示を援用して本文の記載の一部とする。 Note that the requirements of the above-described embodiments can be combined as appropriate. Some components may not be used. In addition, as long as it is permitted by law, a part of the description of the text is incorporated with the disclosure of all published publications and US patents related to the illumination device, the observation device, the observation method, etc. cited in the above embodiments and modifications. And

 1、1a、1b…観察装置、10、10a、10b…照明装置、101…光源、110…光線束生成部、111…回折格子(多方向回折格子)、112…回折格子、120…位相付与部、121…第1領域(基準相領域)、122…第2領域(位相変調領域)、150…照明光学系(干渉光学系)、160、160a、160b…駆動制御部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1, 1a, 1b ... Observation apparatus, 10, 10a, 10b ... Illumination device, 101 ... Light source, 110 ... Ray bundle production | generation part, 111 ... Diffraction grating (multi-directional diffraction grating), 112 ... Diffraction grating, 120 ... Phase provision part 121 ... 1st area | region (reference | standard phase area | region), 122 ... 2nd area | region (phase modulation area | region), 150 ... Illumination optical system (interference optical system), 160, 160a, 160b ... Drive control part

Claims (17)

 標本を干渉縞で照明する照明装置において、
 光源から射出された光から、第1光線束と第2光線束とを生成する光線束生成部と、
 前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とに位相差を付与する位相付与部と、
 前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とを干渉させて干渉縞を生成する干渉光学系と、
 前記光線束生成部及び前記位相付与部をそれぞれ駆動して、前記干渉縞の方向と前記位相差との少なくとも一方を変化させる駆動制御部と
 を備えることを特徴とする照明装置。
In an illumination device that illuminates a specimen with interference fringes,
A light flux generation unit that generates a first light flux and a second light flux from light emitted from the light source;
A phase imparting section that imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux;
An interference optical system that generates interference fringes by causing the first light flux and the second light flux to interfere with each other;
An illumination apparatus comprising: a drive control unit that drives each of the light beam generation unit and the phase providing unit to change at least one of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference.
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部及び前記位相付与部を駆動して、前記干渉縞の方向が所定方向の際に前記位相差を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の照明装置。
The drive control unit
The lighting device according to claim 1, wherein the light flux generation unit and the phase providing unit are driven to change the phase difference when the direction of the interference fringes is a predetermined direction.
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部及び前記位相付与部を駆動して、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の照明装置。
The drive control unit
The lighting device according to claim 1, wherein the light flux generation unit and the phase providing unit are driven to change the direction of the interference fringes when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
 前記光線束生成部は、
 互いに異なる3以上の各方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を複数の光線束に分割する多方向回折格子と、
 前記多方向回折格子が分割した複数の光線束のうちから、2つの光線束を、前記第1光線束及び前記第2光線束として選択する光線束選択部と
 を備え、
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束選択部及び前記位相付与部をそれぞれ駆動して、前記第1光線束または前記第2光線束の少なくとも一方を前記位相付与部に入射させ、かつ、前記入射させる前記位相付与部上の位置を変化させることにより、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項3に記載の照明装置。
The light flux generator is
A multidirectional diffraction grating having a periodic structure in three or more directions different from each other and dividing an incident light beam into a plurality of light beams;
A light bundle selection unit that selects two light bundles among the plurality of light bundles divided by the multidirectional diffraction grating as the first light bundle and the second light bundle;
The drive control unit
The light beam selecting unit and the phase providing unit are respectively driven so that at least one of the first light beam or the second light beam is incident on the phase applying unit and on the phase applying unit to be incident The lighting device according to claim 3, wherein the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference by changing a position.
 前記光線束生成部は、
 1方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を前記第1光線束及び前記第2光線束を含む複数の光線束に分割する光線束分割部
 を備え、
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束分割部及び前記位相付与部を駆動して、前記第1光線束または前記第2光線束の少なくとも一方を前記位相付与部に入射させ、かつ、前記入射させる前記位相付与部上の位置を変化させることにより、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項3または請求項4に記載の照明装置。
The light flux generator is
A beam bundle splitting unit that has a periodic structure in one direction and divides an incident beam bundle into a plurality of beam bundles including the first beam bundle and the second beam bundle;
The drive control unit
Driving the light beam splitting unit and the phase applying unit to cause at least one of the first light beam bundle or the second light beam to enter the phase applying unit, and the position on the phase applying unit to be incident 5. The illumination device according to claim 3, wherein the direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference.
 前記位相付与部は、
 入射する光線束を通過させる基準相領域と、
 入射する光線束を前記基準相領域を通過した光線束の位相と異なる位相の光線束に変換して通過させる位相変調領域と
 を備え、
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部と前記位相付与部とを駆動して、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とのうち、一方の光線束を前記基準相領域に入射させ、他方の光線束を前記位相変調領域に入射させつつ、前記基準相領域内における前記入射させる位置と、前記位相変調領域内における前記入射させる位置とを変化させることにより、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項3から請求項5のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
The phase applying unit is
A reference phase region through which the incident light bundle passes,
A phase modulation region that converts an incident light beam into a light beam having a phase different from the phase of the light beam that has passed through the reference phase region;
The drive control unit
Driving the light beam generation unit and the phase providing unit to cause one light beam of the first light beam and the second light beam to be incident on the reference phase region, and the other light beam to By changing the incident position in the reference phase area and the incident position in the phase modulation area while entering the phase modulation area, the interference occurs when the phase difference has a predetermined phase difference. The illumination device according to any one of claims 3 to 5, wherein a direction of the stripe is changed.
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記干渉光学系の光軸を回転中心として前記光線束生成部を回転させることにより、当該光軸の周りに沿って、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束との光路を変化させて前記干渉縞の方向を制御する
 ことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項6のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
The drive control unit
By rotating the light beam generation unit about the optical axis of the interference optical system as a rotation center, the optical path between the first light beam and the second light beam is changed along the optical axis to change the optical path. The direction of an interference fringe is controlled. The illuminating device as described in any one of Claims 1-6 characterized by the above-mentioned.
 前記光線束生成部は、光源から射出された光から第3光線束を生成し、
 前記位相付与部は、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束、前記第2光線束と前記第3光線束、および前記第3光線束と前記第1光線束のそれぞれに位相差を付与し、
 前記干渉光学系は、前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束と前記第3光線束とを干渉させて干渉縞を生成することを特徴とする請求項1から請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
The light flux generation unit generates a third light flux from light emitted from a light source,
The phase imparting unit imparts a phase difference to each of the first light flux and the second light flux, the second light flux and the third light flux, and the third light flux and the first light flux. ,
4. The interference optical system generates interference fringes by causing the first light bundle, the second light bundle, and the third light bundle to interfere with each other. 5. The lighting device described in 1.
 前記駆動制御部による前記干渉縞の方向と前記位相差とを変化させている間、前記光線束生成部が生成する光線束のうち、少なくとも一部の光線束を遮光する遮光部
 を備えることを特徴とする請求項1から請求項8のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
A light shielding unit that shields at least a part of the light bundles generated by the light bundle generation unit while the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference are changed by the drive control unit. The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the lighting device is characterized.
 前記光線束生成部が生成した光線束の偏光状態を直線偏光にする偏光部
 を備え、
 前記干渉光学系は、
 前記偏光部が直線偏光にした前記光線束を、前記標本の近傍において前記標本に対してS偏光にして前記干渉縞を生成する
 ことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項9のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
A polarization unit that converts the polarization state of the light beam generated by the light beam generation unit into linearly polarized light,
The interference optical system is
10. The interference fringe is generated by making the light beam that has been linearly polarized by the polarization unit into S-polarized light with respect to the sample in the vicinity of the sample. The lighting device described in 1.
 前記位相付与部は、
 回折光の集光により形成される共役面近傍に配置される
 ことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項10のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
The phase applying unit is
It is arrange | positioned in the conjugate surface formed by condensing of diffracted light. The illuminating device as described in any one of Claims 1-10 characterized by the above-mentioned.
 標本を干渉縞で照明する照明装置において、
 光源から射出された光から、第1光線束と第2光線束とを生成する光線束生成部と、
 前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とに位相差を付与する位相付与部と、
 前記第1光線束と前記第2光線束とを干渉させて干渉縞を生成する干渉光学系と、
 前記光線束生成部を連続して駆動し、かつ、前記位相付与部を断続して駆動して、前記干渉縞の方向と前記位相差との少なくとも一方を変化させる駆動制御部と
 を備えることを特徴とする照明装置。
In an illumination device that illuminates a specimen with interference fringes,
A light flux generation unit that generates a first light flux and a second light flux from light emitted from the light source;
A phase imparting section that imparts a phase difference between the first light flux and the second light flux;
An interference optical system that generates interference fringes by causing the first light flux and the second light flux to interfere with each other;
A drive control unit that continuously drives the light beam generation unit and intermittently drives the phase providing unit to change at least one of the direction of the interference fringes and the phase difference. A lighting device.
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部を連続して駆動し、かつ、前記位相付与部を断続して駆動して、前記干渉縞の方向が所定方向の際に前記位相差を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項12に記載の照明装置。
The drive control unit
The phase difference is changed when the direction of the interference fringes is a predetermined direction by continuously driving the light beam generation unit and driving the phase applying unit intermittently. 12. The lighting device according to 12.
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部を連続して駆動し、かつ、前記位相付与部を断続して駆動して、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項12に記載の照明装置。
The drive control unit
The beam bundle generating unit is continuously driven, and the phase applying unit is intermittently driven to change the direction of the interference fringes when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference. The lighting device according to claim 12.
 前記光線束生成部は、
 1方向に周期構造を有し、入射する光線束を前記第1光線束及び前記第2光線束を含む複数の光線束に分割する光線束分割部
 を備え、
 前記駆動制御部は、
 前記光線束生成部を連続して駆動し、かつ、前記位相付与部を断続して駆動して、前記第1光線束または前記第2光線束の少なくとも一方を前記位相付与部に入射させ、かつ、前記入射させる前記位相付与部上の位置を変化させることにより、前記位相差が所定の位相差の際に前記干渉縞の方向を変化させる
 ことを特徴とする請求項13から請求項14のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置。
The light flux generator is
A beam bundle splitting unit that has a periodic structure in one direction and divides an incident beam bundle into a plurality of beam bundles including the first beam bundle and the second beam bundle;
The drive control unit
Continuously driving the light beam generating unit, driving the phase applying unit intermittently, and causing at least one of the first light beam or the second light beam to enter the phase applying unit; and The direction of the interference fringes is changed when the phase difference is a predetermined phase difference by changing a position on the phase applying unit to be incident. 15. The lighting device according to claim 1.
 請求項1から請求項15のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置と、
 前記照明装置が干渉縞で照明した標本の像を結像させる結像光学系と、
 前記結像光学系によって結像された前記標本の像を撮像する撮像部と、
 前記撮像部が撮像した前記像に基づいて、前記標本の画像を生成する演算部と
 を備える観察装置。
The lighting device according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
An imaging optical system that forms an image of the specimen illuminated by the interference fringe by the illumination device;
An imaging unit that captures an image of the specimen imaged by the imaging optical system;
An observation device comprising: a calculation unit that generates an image of the specimen based on the image captured by the imaging unit.
 請求項1から請求項15のいずれか一項に記載の照明装置が干渉縞で標本を照明することと、
 前記照明によって照明された標本の像を結像させる結像光学系によって結像された前記標本の像を撮像することと、
 前記撮像によって撮像された前記標本の像に基づいて、前記標本の画像を生成する演算手順と
 を有する観察方法。
The illumination device according to any one of claims 1 to 15 illuminates a specimen with interference fringes;
Capturing an image of the specimen imaged by an imaging optical system that forms an image of the specimen illuminated by the illumination;
An observation method comprising: a calculation procedure for generating an image of the sample based on the image of the sample imaged by the imaging.
PCT/JP2014/052690 2014-02-05 2014-02-05 Lighting device, observation device, and observation method Ceased WO2015118634A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2014/052690 WO2015118634A1 (en) 2014-02-05 2014-02-05 Lighting device, observation device, and observation method

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2014/052690 WO2015118634A1 (en) 2014-02-05 2014-02-05 Lighting device, observation device, and observation method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015118634A1 true WO2015118634A1 (en) 2015-08-13

Family

ID=53777467

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/052690 Ceased WO2015118634A1 (en) 2014-02-05 2014-02-05 Lighting device, observation device, and observation method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2015118634A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020179040A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179039A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179032A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179036A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope
EP3973848A1 (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-03-30 Hoya Lens Thailand Ltd. Refraction measuring apparatus
US12279821B2 (en) 2018-12-28 2025-04-22 Hoya Lens Thailand Ltd. Refractive property measurement device, measurement tool, and refractive property measurement method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009031418A1 (en) * 2007-09-05 2009-03-12 Nikon Corporation Microscope device
WO2011135819A1 (en) * 2010-04-26 2011-11-03 株式会社ニコン Structural illumination microscope device
WO2013001805A1 (en) * 2011-06-29 2013-01-03 株式会社ニコン Structured illumination optical system and structured illumination microscope device
WO2014017067A1 (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 株式会社ニコン Structured lighting device and structured lighting microscope

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009031418A1 (en) * 2007-09-05 2009-03-12 Nikon Corporation Microscope device
WO2011135819A1 (en) * 2010-04-26 2011-11-03 株式会社ニコン Structural illumination microscope device
WO2013001805A1 (en) * 2011-06-29 2013-01-03 株式会社ニコン Structured illumination optical system and structured illumination microscope device
WO2014017067A1 (en) * 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 株式会社ニコン Structured lighting device and structured lighting microscope

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12279821B2 (en) 2018-12-28 2025-04-22 Hoya Lens Thailand Ltd. Refractive property measurement device, measurement tool, and refractive property measurement method
WO2020179040A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179039A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179032A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope and observation method
WO2020179036A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 株式会社ニコン Microscope
EP3973848A1 (en) * 2020-09-28 2022-03-30 Hoya Lens Thailand Ltd. Refraction measuring apparatus
US12245814B2 (en) 2020-09-28 2025-03-11 Hoya Lens Thailand Ltd. Refraction measuring apparatus

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10983328B2 (en) Structured illumination microscope apparatus and an image forming apparatus
US10739574B2 (en) Structured illumination optical system and structured illumination microscope device
JP6264377B2 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP5907998B2 (en) Variable orientation lighting pattern rotator
JP6033798B2 (en) System and method for illumination phase control in fluorescence microscopy
WO2015118634A1 (en) Lighting device, observation device, and observation method
JP6194710B2 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP5278522B2 (en) Microscope equipment
JP4899408B2 (en) Microscope equipment
JP6137324B2 (en) Illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP6364750B2 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
WO2015052920A1 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP6127451B2 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP6413364B2 (en) Illumination optical system and microscope apparatus
JP2015064438A (en) Structured illumination microscope
JP2013011728A (en) Microscope equipment
JP6409260B2 (en) Structured illumination device and structured illumination microscope device
JP2002196253A (en) Interference fringe projection optical system and microscope using this optical system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14881730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14881730

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP